WO2022044563A1 - Mounting method, and mounting system - Google Patents

Mounting method, and mounting system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022044563A1
WO2022044563A1 PCT/JP2021/025873 JP2021025873W WO2022044563A1 WO 2022044563 A1 WO2022044563 A1 WO 2022044563A1 JP 2021025873 W JP2021025873 W JP 2021025873W WO 2022044563 A1 WO2022044563 A1 WO 2022044563A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
case
parts
cover
attachment
feeder
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/025873
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
和宜 石川
能彦 八木
祐二 阿部
寛人 住田
達哉 佐野
Original Assignee
パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 filed Critical パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社
Priority to JP2022545507A priority Critical patent/JPWO2022044563A1/ja
Publication of WO2022044563A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022044563A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K13/00Apparatus or processes specially adapted for manufacturing or adjusting assemblages of electric components
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H05ELECTRIC TECHNIQUES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H05KPRINTED CIRCUITS; CASINGS OR CONSTRUCTIONAL DETAILS OF ELECTRIC APPARATUS; MANUFACTURE OF ASSEMBLAGES OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
    • H05K13/00Apparatus or processes specially adapted for manufacturing or adjusting assemblages of electric components
    • H05K13/02Feeding of components

Definitions

  • This disclosure relates to a mounting method and a mounting system.
  • Patent Document 1 when the bulk cassette inserted in the bulk feeder is replaced, the electronic component chip passing through the chip feeding path for moving the electronic component chip supplied from the bulk cassette to a predetermined position is no longer detected. In this state, it is disclosed that the bulk cassette is taken out and a new bulk cassette is inserted into the bulk cuffer.
  • the present disclosure provides a mounting method and a mounting system that can suppress a decrease in productivity.
  • a first accommodating portion for accommodating parts in a bulk state is removable, and a second accommodating portion for accommodating the parts supplied from the first accommodating portion is provided.
  • It is a mounting method in a mounting system including a feeder having a feeder and a component mounting unit that holds the component supplied by the feeder and mounts the component on an object, wherein the component mounting unit holds the component in the feeder. It includes a mounting step of mounting on the object and a component replenishment step of replacing the first accommodating portion with the component remaining in the second accommodating portion.
  • a first accommodating portion for accommodating parts in a bulk state is removable, and a second accommodating portion for accommodating the parts supplied from the first accommodating portion is provided.
  • the feeder to be held, the component mounting unit that holds the component supplied by the feeder and mounts it on the object, and the first accommodating portion with the component remaining in the second accommodating portion are exchanged. It is provided with a control unit that controls the operation.
  • FIG. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mounting system according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the mounting system according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 1C is a diagram showing a configuration of a transfer robot according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration of a component mounting device according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a supply unit according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which each of the case, the attachment, and the feeder main body according to the embodiment is removed.
  • FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the case according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the opening and closing of the cover of the case according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mounting system according to an embodiment.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the mounting system according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a second diagram for explaining the opening and closing of the cover of the case according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing how the transfer robot grips the case according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic view of the feeder to which the case according to the embodiment is attached when viewed from the longitudinal direction of the case.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the transfer of parts by the transfer unit according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a state in which the cover of the attachment according to the embodiment is open.
  • FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a state in which the cover of the attachment according to the embodiment is closed.
  • FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a state in which the cover of the attachment according to the embodiment is closed and locked.
  • FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a state in which the cover of the attachment according to the embodiment is open.
  • FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a state in which the cover of the attachment according to the embodiment is closed.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view for explaining the arrangement of the antenna and the RF tag according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an operation of exchanging cases of the mounting system according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing how the case is attached to the attachment according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an operation of exchanging a case and a feeder of the mounting system according to the embodiment.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an operation of acquiring the tag information shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram for explaining a process of identifying an RF tag corresponding to an antenna.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the appearance of the case according to the first modification of the embodiment.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram schematically showing a state in which the case according to the first modification of the embodiment is attached to the feeder main body.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing how the case according to the second modification of the embodiment is attached to the attachment.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the opening and closing of the cover of the attachment according to the third modification of the embodiment.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a feeder (bulk feeder) into which a case (bulk cassette) to which a barcode is attached is inserted.
  • the case houses electronic component chips (components) in bulk.
  • the central controller reads the barcode of the case inserted in the feeder with the barcode reader, and if the information of the electronic component chip indicated by the barcode matches the information of the specified electronic component chip, the shutter is closed.
  • the shutter solenoid that locks to the state is turned on to open and close the shutter, and the shutter opening / closing plate is unlocked.
  • the shutter opening / closing lever connected to the shutter opening / closing plate is pulled (driven) by the spring, so that the shutter opening / closing plate slides and the shutter opens.
  • the electronic component chip in the case is supplied to the chip feeding unit.
  • Patent Document 1 when the bulk cassette inserted in the bulk feeder is replaced, the electronic component chip supplied from the bulk cassette passes through a chip feeding path (conveying unit) for moving the electronic component chip to a predetermined position. It is disclosed that the bulk cassette is taken out and a new bulk cassette is inserted into the bulk cuffer when the component chip is no longer detected.
  • Patent Document 1 the bulk cassette is replaced in a state where the electronic component chip passing through the chip feeding path is not detected.
  • the supply of the electronic component chip is stopped because there is no electronic component chip in the chip feeding path. That is, the productivity in the mounting process may decrease while the bulk cassette is being replaced. Therefore, the inventors of the present application have diligently studied a mounting method and the like that can suppress a decrease in productivity when exchanging cases, and devised a mounting method and the like described below.
  • each figure is a schematic diagram and is not necessarily exactly illustrated. Further, in each figure, the same reference numerals may be given to substantially the same configurations, and duplicate explanations may be omitted or simplified. Further, even when the same object is shown in each figure, the scale may be changed for convenience.
  • FIG. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment. First, the outline of the mounting system 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1A.
  • the mounting system 1 of the present embodiment includes an integrated control device 50, a first control device 50a, a second control device 50b, a transfer robot 60, a supply unit 80, and a parts storage. It includes a W and a mounting line 90 including a plurality of component mounting devices 100. Further, the mounting system 1 includes three areas, a storage area A1, a preparation area A2, and a mounting area A3.
  • the case 10 is an example of a parts accommodating portion and a first accommodating portion for accommodating parts in a bulk state
  • the attachment 30 has a function of conveying the parts supplied from the case 10.
  • the component is, for example, an electronic component such as a resistor or a capacitor, but the component is not limited to this, and may be any component that can be mounted on a substrate.
  • the storage area A1 is an area for storing the case 10 and the attachment 30.
  • the storage area A1 includes, for example, a parts storage W. At least one of the case 10, the attachment 30, and the attachment 30 to which the case 10 is attached is stored in the parts storage W. Further, in the parts storage W, the tag information stored in the RF tag can be read from the RF (Radio Frequency) tag attached to each of the case 10 and the attachment 30, and the tag information to be written in the RF tag can be read.
  • a reader / writer RW for writing is attached. The reader / writer RW is fixed and can simultaneously acquire tag information transmitted from a plurality of RF tags. Further, the tag information to be written in the RF tag can be transmitted to a plurality of RF tags at the same time.
  • the tag information includes information about the parts housed in the case 10 when the RF tag is attached to the case 10.
  • the tag information includes at least one of information indicating the type of a part (identification information), information indicating a quantity (remaining number), information indicating an expiration date, and the like.
  • the information indicating the quantity is the quantity at the present time.
  • the tag information includes at least one such as the identification information of the attachment 30 and the usage history when the RF tag is attached to the attachment 30.
  • the tag information read by the reader / writer RW is managed by the integrated control device 50.
  • FIG. 1A illustrates an example in which the storage area A1 is separated from the mounting area A3, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the storage area A1 may be provided as a part of the mounting area A3.
  • the component storage W may be included in the mounting area A3.
  • the mounting line 90 may include a component storage W.
  • the preparation area A2 is an area for preparing in advance what is used in the mounting line 90 of the mounting area A3.
  • the supply unit 80 to be mounted on the mounting line 90 is prepared in advance.
  • the supply unit 80 includes, for example, a dolly 70 having a holding portion 71, a feeder main body portion 40 held by the holding portion 71, an attachment 30 attached to the feeder main body portion 40, and a case 10 attached to the attachment 30. ..
  • the dolly 70 includes a plurality of holding portions 71. Note that FIG. 1A shows one of the plurality of holding portions 71. In this case, for example, a carriage 70 to which the feeder main body 40 and the attachment 30 are attached is arranged in the preparation area A2.
  • the second control device 50b is used in the next production by instructing the transfer robot 60 to attach the case 10 for accommodating the parts used in the next production in the mounting line 90 to the attachment 30 attached to the carriage 70.
  • Supply unit 80 is prepared in advance. In the preparation area A2, not only the trolley 70 but also a holding device that can be connected to the trolley 70 may be prepared as long as the case 10 and the like can be held.
  • the dolly 70 is provided with a reading device 130.
  • the reading device 130 is fixed to, for example, the holding portion 71 of the carriage 70.
  • the supply unit 80 may be connected to an external power source.
  • the supply unit 80 may include a power supply unit inside (for example, inside the carriage 70).
  • a case 10 for accommodating parts that may be replenished may be transported from the parts storage W and stored.
  • the time can be shortened as compared with the case of transporting the case 10 from the storage area A1.
  • the mounting area A3 is an area where the mounting line 90 is arranged.
  • the mounting area A3 and the preparation area A2 may be arranged in the same space.
  • the mounting line 90 produces a mounting board by mounting the components housed in the case 10 on the board carried in from the upstream side, and carries out the produced mounting board to the downstream side.
  • the mounting line 90 is realized by various devices that supply a substrate, perform solder printing work, component mounting work, reflow work, and the like.
  • the component mounting work is performed by the component mounting device 100.
  • the integrated control device 50 is connected to the first control device 50a and the second control device 50b, and aggregates and manages information on each component of the mounting system 1.
  • the first control device 50a controls each component of the mounting line 90.
  • the first control device 50a controls the production of the mounting line 90, for example, based on the production plan. Even if each component of the mounting line 90 is controlled by the first control device 50a and a control device (not shown) provided in each component of the mounting line 90 (for example, the component mounting device 100). good.
  • the first control device 50a transmits a supply request for parts to the integrated control device 50.
  • the second control device 50b receives the supply request for the parts from the integrated control device 50, outputs the supply instruction to the transfer robot 60, and supplies the parts. Specifically, the second control device 50b replenishes the transfer robot 60 with a position in the storage area A1 of the case 10 to be replenished, a movement path of the transfer robot 60, and a position for replenishing the case 10 (for example,).
  • the position in the mounting line 90, the position in the component mounting device 100, the position in the supply unit 80, and the position in the preparation area A2) are instructed.
  • the transfer robot 60 conveys the case 10 accommodating the parts to be replenished from the storage area A1 to the mounting line 90, and transfers the case 10 of the supply unit 80 to the new case 10. Exchange. Specifically, the transfer robot 60 collects the case 10 of the supply unit 80 and attaches a new case 10.
  • the second control device 50b controls the transfer robot 60 to supply the case 10 attached to the mounting line 90.
  • the case 10 and the attachment 30 of the unit 80 are replaced.
  • the transfer robot 60 is a self-propelled robot that conveys the case 10 and the attachment 30 under the control of the second control device 50b.
  • the transfer robot 60 will be described with reference to FIG. 1C.
  • FIG. 1C is a diagram showing a configuration of a transfer robot 60 according to the present embodiment.
  • the transfer robot 60 is composed of, for example, a traveling unit 62, a storage unit 63, and a robot arm 61.
  • the traveling unit 62 includes wheels and a motor for driving the wheels.
  • the case 10 and the attachment 30 are stored in the storage unit 63.
  • the storage unit 63 is formed with, for example, a holding unit 63a for holding each of the plurality of cases 10 and the attachment 30.
  • the transfer robot 60 can transfer the plurality of cases 10 and the attachments 30 at one time by moving the plurality of cases 10 and the attachments 30 in a state of being stored in the storage unit 63.
  • a robot arm 61 is provided above the storage unit 63. The tip of the robot arm 61 is formed so that the case 10 and the attachment 30 can be gripped.
  • the transfer robot 60 mounts the case 10 and the attachment 30 stored in the storage unit 63 by the robot arm 61 on the component mounting device 100. As a result, the transfer robot 60 can attach the case 10 and the attachment 30 to the plurality of component mounting devices 100 by one transfer.
  • the shape and transfer method of the transfer robot 60 are examples, and are not limited to the above.
  • the transport robot 60 may transport the object by supporting or gripping the object with the robot arm 61.
  • the dolly 70 or the supply unit 80 may be supported or gripped and conveyed.
  • the second control device 50b controls the transfer robot 60 and prepares the supply unit in advance.
  • the 80 is conveyed and replaced with the supply unit 80 attached to the mounting line 90.
  • the mounting system 1 is a system in which the integrated control device 50 manages the supply of parts and the change of the type of parts.
  • FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration of a component mounting device 100 according to the present embodiment.
  • the component mounting device 100 is a device for mounting components on the board 103 will be described.
  • the component mounting device 100 has a function of taking out components from a feeder that supplies the components and transferring and mounting the components on the board 103.
  • the substrate 103 is an example of an object on which components are mounted.
  • the component mounting device 100 includes a supply unit 80, a base 101, a board transfer mechanism 102, a component mounting mechanism 108 including a mounting head 107, a board recognition camera 109, and a component recognition camera 110. And a power supply unit 111 (see FIG. 1B).
  • the substrate transfer mechanism 102 is arranged near the center of the base 101 along the X axis (in the transfer direction of the substrate 103).
  • the board transfer mechanism 102 transports the board 103 carried in from the upstream side in the direction along the X-axis, and positions and holds the board 103 on the mounting stage set for executing the component mounting work.
  • the supply unit 80 is detachably mounted on a supply unit mounting portion (not shown) of the base 101, which is the main body of the component mounting device 100. More specifically, in the supply unit 80, a dolly 70 constituting the supply unit 80 is mounted on the supply unit mounting portion.
  • the supply unit mounting portions are provided on both sides of the substrate transfer mechanism 102, and the supply unit 80 is also arranged on both sides of the substrate transfer mechanism 102.
  • a plurality of feeders 20 can be arranged in parallel along the Y axis in each supply unit 80, and at least one feeder 20 (bulk feeder) is mounted in parallel.
  • the feeder 20 includes, for example, a feeder main body 40 and an attachment 30.
  • the substrate transfer mechanism 102 is an example of a substrate transfer unit.
  • each functional unit for example, a vibration generating unit 41, a driving unit 45, a reading device 130, etc., which will be described later
  • a power supply unit 111 of the supply unit 80 are electrically connected. Power is supplied from the power supply unit 111 to each functional unit of the supply unit 80.
  • the feeder 20 arranged in the supply unit 80 supplies the components to the take-out position by the mounting head 107 of the component mounting mechanism 108.
  • the mounting head 107 is an example of a component mounting unit.
  • An X-axis moving table 105 provided with a linear drive mechanism is arranged in the X-axis direction on the upper surface of the base 101 at the end in the minus direction of the Y-axis, and the X-axis moving table 105 is similarly linearly driven.
  • Two Y-axis moving tables 106 equipped with a mechanism are movably connected in the X-axis direction.
  • a mounting head 107 is mounted on each of the two Y-axis moving tables 106 so as to be movable in the Y-axis direction.
  • the mounting head 107 mounts a component held by the feeder 20 arranged in the supply unit 80 on the substrate 103.
  • the mounting head 107 is equipped with a component suction nozzle (not shown) that sucks and holds the component and can be raised and lowered individually.
  • the mounting head 107 includes a Z-axis elevating mechanism for raising and lowering the component suction nozzle and a ⁇ -axis rotation mechanism for rotating the component suction nozzle around the nozzle axis.
  • the mounting head 107 By driving the X-axis moving table 105 and the Y-axis moving table 106, the mounting head 107 moves in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. As a result, the two mounting heads 107 take out the parts from the take-out positions of the feeders 20 arranged in the corresponding supply units 80 by the parts suction nozzles.
  • the component mounting mechanism 108 is configured by the substrate transfer mechanism 102, the X-axis moving table 105, the Y-axis moving table 106, and the mounting head 107.
  • a component recognition camera 110 is arranged between each of the upper and lower carriages 70 and the board transfer mechanism 102.
  • the component recognition camera 110 takes an image of the component held by the mounting head 107.
  • a processing unit not shown
  • the mounting head 107 is equipped with a board recognition camera 109 that is located on the lower surface side of the Y-axis moving table 106 and moves integrally with the mounting head 107.
  • the board recognition camera 109 moves above the board 103 positioned by the board transfer mechanism 102 and takes an image of the board 103.
  • the position of the substrate 103 is detected by recognizing the image pickup result by the image recognition of the processing unit in the same manner.
  • the power supply unit 111 supplies electric power to each functional unit of the component mounting device 100.
  • the power supply unit 111 supplies electric power to the supply unit 80 arranged in the substrate transfer mechanism 102, for example.
  • the power supply unit 111 supplies electric power to the vibration generating unit 41, the driving unit 45, the reading device 130, and the like of the supply unit 80.
  • the power supply unit 111 may be connected to an external power supply.
  • the power supply unit 111 may supply electric power to each functional unit under the control of the first control device 50a, but the power supply unit 111 is not limited to this.
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a supply unit 80 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which the case 10, the attachment 30, and the feeder main body 40 according to the present embodiment are removed.
  • the mounting head 107 holds and takes out the parts conveyed by the vibration generated by the vibration generating unit 41 on the conveying unit 34 of the attachment 30. Is also illustrated.
  • Retention comprises at least one of adsorption or grip.
  • FIG. 3 shows a state in which the cover 11 of the case 10 is open.
  • the mounting system 1 has a vibration generating unit 41, a driving unit 45, an integrated control device 50, a first control device 50a, and a second control device as functional configurations. 50b, a transfer robot 60, a mounting head 107, a power supply unit 111, a reading device 130, a sensor 140, a component detection unit 141, an RF tag T, and a reader / writer RW provided in the component storage W.
  • the vibration generating unit 41 and the driving unit 45 are provided in the feeder main body unit 40
  • the power supply unit 111 is provided in the component mounting device 100
  • the reading device 130 is provided in the carriage 70.
  • the RF tag T includes the RF tag T2 of the case 10, the RF tag T3 of the attachment 30, the RF tag T1 of the feeder main body 40, and the RF tag T4 of the roll case 120.
  • FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the case 10 according to the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the engaging portion 13 is not shown.
  • the case 10 includes a cover 11, a case main body 12, an engaging portion 13, a first convex portion 14, a cover 17 (see FIG. 6), and a second. It has a convex portion 18 and an RF tag T2. Further, the case main body portion 12 is formed with an opening 15 and a notch portion 19.
  • the cover 11 covers the opening 15 to prevent other parts from being mixed into the case 10.
  • the cover 11 is provided in the opening 15 for supplying parts from the storage chamber 12a to the feeder 20.
  • the cover 11 covers the opening 15 when the case 10 is not attached to the attachment 30. Further, the cover 11 is opened when collation is performed to see if the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 and the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30, and the collation is successful. By performing the collation, it is possible to further suppress the mixing of parts in the feeder 20.
  • the cover 11 is an example of the first cover.
  • FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the opening and closing of the cover 11 of the case 10 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 6A is an enlarged view showing the broken line region R in FIG. 5, and shows a state in which the cover 11 of the case 10 is closed (closed state). For example, if the case 10 is removed from the attachment 30, or the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 but is being collated, or the collation fails, the cover is shown in FIG. 6 (a). 11 is in the closed state.
  • the cover 11 is rotatably supported by the case body 12 with respect to the rotation axis J.
  • the case main body portion 12 has a cover 17 that covers one end portion 11a of the cover 11 from the outer side of the case 10.
  • the cover 17 is provided so that one end 11a of the case 10 cannot be touched from the outside of the case 10, that is, the cover 11 of the case 10 cannot be easily opened by an operator or the like. As a result, it is possible to prevent other parts from being mixed into the case 10.
  • the cover 17 has, for example, a plate shape.
  • a through hole 17a is formed in the cover 17.
  • the through hole 17a penetrates the cover 17 in the X-axis direction (longitudinal direction of the feeder 20).
  • the through hole 17a may be provided at a position corresponding to the rod body 33 of the mounted portion 32 of the attachment 30, and may be of a size that allows the rod body 33 to be inserted.
  • the through hole 17a may be, for example, of a size that does not allow a worker's finger to enter.
  • a sticker may be attached at a position corresponding to the through hole 17a of the cover 11.
  • FIG. 6B is an enlarged view showing the broken line region R of FIG. 5, and shows a state (open state) in which the case 10 is mounted on the mounted portion 32 and the cover 11 of the case 10 is open. ..
  • the cover 11 is opened as shown in FIG. 6B.
  • the first control device 50a controls the drive unit 45 to move the rod body 33 to the case 10 side.
  • the rod body 33 inserts the through hole 17a of the cover 17 and pushes the one end portion 11a of the cover 11 toward the minus side of the X-axis.
  • the cover 11 rotates counterclockwise about the axis of rotation J. In other words, the rod body 33 presses the cover 11 to rotate the cover 11 about the rotation axis J.
  • the cover 11 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the physical action of the rod body 33 of the attached portion 32 to which the case 10 is attached / detached.
  • the transition from the open state to the closed state of the cover 11 may be realized by moving the rod body 33 to the X-axis plus side (the rod body 33 is housed inside the mounted portion 32).
  • the cover 11 can be closed only by the first control device 50a controlling the drive unit 45 to move the rod body 33 to the X-axis plus side.
  • the drive unit 45 automatically shifts the cover 11 from the open state to the closed state, so that workability is improved.
  • the cover 11 may be urged to be closed by an elastic body such as a spring (not shown).
  • an elastic body such as a spring (not shown).
  • the other end of the cover 11 opposite to the one end 11a is pushed to the minus side of the X-axis by an elastic body, and the cover 11 rotates clockwise (when viewed from the direction of FIG. 6) about the rotation axis J. It is being urged in the direction of
  • the rod body 33 moves to the plus side of the X-axis (is housed inside the mounted portion 32)
  • the cover 11 changes from the open state to the closed state, and the cover 11 is urged to the minus side of the X-axis.
  • FIG. 7 is a second diagram for explaining the opening and closing of the cover 11 of the case 10 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 7 is a diagram partially showing an example of a cross section taken along line VII-VII in FIG. 6 (b). In FIG. 7, the rod body 33 is not shown.
  • the case main body 12 has a plurality of locking portions 12b protruding from the inner surface of the case main body 12 and the cover 17 at a portion surrounding one end portion 11a.
  • FIG. 7 illustrates an example of having five locking portions 12b1 to 12b5, but the number of locking portions 12b is not particularly limited.
  • one end 11a of the cover 11 is fixed by the locking portions 12b4 and 12b5.
  • one end portion 11a of the cover 11 may be fixed by the locking portion 12b1 and the inner surface (the surface on the minus side of the X-axis) of the cover 17.
  • the elastic body provided to urge the cover 11 to be closed is locked.
  • the movement of the elastic body to the negative side of the X-axis is restricted so that the other end of the cover 11 opposite to the one end 11a is not urged to the negative side of the X-axis by the elastic body.
  • the cover 11 can maintain a desired open state even if it is not continuously pressed by the rod body 33 by providing the locking portion 12b.
  • the first control device 50a may open the cover 11 to a desired degree of opening by the rod body 33, and then return the rod body 33 to the mounted portion 32.
  • the power consumption required for the rod body 33 to continue pressing the one end portion 11a can be reduced.
  • deterioration of the rod body 33 can be suppressed.
  • the elastic body When the case 10 is removed from the attachment 30, the elastic body is unlocked and the cover 11 is urged to be closed.
  • the mechanism for closing the cover 11 is not limited to this.
  • a rod body (not shown) that pushes one end of the cover 11 opposite to the one end 11a in the minus direction of the X-axis may be provided.
  • the cover 11 does not have to be urged to be closed by an elastic body such as a spring. That is, when the locking portion 12b is provided, the elastic body for closing the cover 11 may not be provided. In this case, the cover 11 may be locked by the locking portion 12b so that the opening degree of the opening 15 becomes smaller when the case 10 is removed from the attachment 30.
  • the case main body portion 12 is an accommodating body for accommodating parts in a bulk state.
  • the case body 12 is, for example, a long box body.
  • the case main body 12 has a storage chamber 12a for accommodating parts in a bulk state.
  • the accommodation chamber 12a has an inclined surface 16 that inclines downward toward the opening 15 (in the example of FIG. 5, in the negative direction of the Z axis).
  • the inclination angle of the inclined surface 16 is not particularly limited, and it is sufficient that the parts of the accommodation chamber 12a move along the inclined surface 16 due to the vibration of the vibration generating portion 41 and can be supplied to the attachment 30.
  • the accommodation chamber 12a Since the accommodation chamber 12a has the inclined surface 16, it becomes easy to supply parts to the attachment 30, and a space can be formed between the accommodation chamber 12a and the outer wall of the case main body portion 12.
  • the RF tag T2 is arranged in the space.
  • the RF tag T2 is arranged, for example, inside the case main body 12 and below the storage chamber 12a. Further, the RF tag T2 has a long shape and is arranged on the case main body 12 so that the longitudinal direction coincides with the longitudinal direction of the case main body 12. This makes it easier to attach the long RF tag T2 to the attachment surface 12c without increasing the area of the attachment surface 12c to which the RF tag T2 is attached.
  • the engaging portion 13 is a recess formed on the lower surface (the surface on the minus side of the Z axis) of the case main body portion 12 in order to fix the case 10 to the attachment 30.
  • the engaging portion 13 is provided at a position corresponding to the claw portion 37 of the mounted portion 32 of the attachment 30, and engages with the claw portion 37. That is, the case 10 is fixed to the attachment 30 by engaging the engaging portion 13 and the claw portion 37.
  • the case 10 cannot be easily removed after the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30.
  • the movement of the claw portion 37 may be restricted by the drive portion 45.
  • the drive portion 45 it is possible to prevent the parts from being mixed by the operator accidentally removing the case 10 from the attachment 30.
  • the case 10 containing parts other than the parts corresponding to the attachment 30 it is possible to prevent the case 10 containing parts other than the parts corresponding to the attachment 30 from being attached to the attachment 30. It is possible to remove the attachment 30 from the case 10 by removing the regulation of the drive unit 45.
  • the first convex portion 14 is a portion gripped by the robot arm 61 when the transfer robot 60 attaches the case 10 to the attachment 30 of the supply unit 80.
  • the first convex portion 14 is provided so as to project from the wall surface on the minus side of the X axis of the case main body portion 12 to the minus side of the X axis, for example.
  • the first convex portion 14 has a positioning portion 14a that determines a gripping position when the robot arm 61 grips the first convex portion 14.
  • the positioning portion 14a is, for example, a pair of recesses formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the first convex portion 14.
  • FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing how the transfer robot 60 grips the case 10 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing the case 10 and the robot arm 61 when the Y-axis plus side is viewed from the Y-axis minus side
  • FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing the case 10 and the robot arm 61 from the X-axis plus side. It is a figure which shows typically the case 10 and the robot arm 61 when the X-axis minus side is seen.
  • the positioning portion 14a which is a recess, has a shape in which the cross-sectional area becomes smaller toward the inner part of a hole such as a quadrangular pyramid.
  • the robot arm 61 has a fitting portion 61a to be fitted to the positioning portion 14a.
  • the fitting portion 61a has a shape corresponding to the shape of the recess of the positioning portion 14a, and has, for example, a shape in contact with the side surface of the hole of the positioning portion 14a.
  • the transfer robot 60 when the transfer robot 60 tries to grip the case 10 with the robot arm 61, even if the positions of the positioning portion 14a and the fitting portion 61a do not completely match, the force gripped by the robot arm 61 causes the case 10. , The center of the fitting portion 61a and the center of the positioning portion 14a move so as to coincide with each other. Therefore, the transfer robot 60 can accurately grip the case 10. Further, the transfer robot 60 can prevent the case 10 from falling while the case 10 is being conveyed by providing the case 10 with the positioning portion 14a.
  • the position where the first convex portion 14 is provided is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 5 as long as the transfer robot 60 can grip the case 10.
  • the first convex portion 14 may be provided, for example, so as to project from the wall surface (upper surface) on the Z-axis plus side of the case main body portion 12 toward the Z-axis plus side.
  • the positioning portion 14a is not limited to being a concave portion, and may be a convex portion or a portion having a friction coefficient different from that of other portions.
  • the second convex portion 18 is a portion that engages with the guide portion (guide portion 39 shown in FIG. 9) provided in the attachment 30 when the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30. .. As shown in FIG. 9, the second convex portion 18 is provided so as to project from the lower surface of the case 10 to the negative side of the Z axis. The second convex portion 18 engages with the guide portion 39 of the attachment 30 of the feeder 20 in a state where the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30. As a result, the case 10 is fixedly attached to the attachment 30.
  • the second convex portion 18 is formed, for example, by forming a long notch 19 in the longitudinal direction of the case 10 on the lower surface of the case main body portion 12.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic view of the feeder 20 to which the case 10 according to the present embodiment is attached when viewed from the longitudinal direction of the case 10.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram partially showing an example of a cross section taken along the line IX-IX in FIG.
  • the second convex portion 18 engages with the guide portion 39 of the attachment 30 of the feeder 20.
  • the second convex portion 18 is attached along the guide portion 39, so that the workability when attaching the case 10 to the attachment 30 is improved.
  • the width w1 of the second convex portion 18 is shorter than the width w2 of the case 10.
  • the width of w2 of the case 10 can be increased as compared with the case where the width w1 of the second convex portion 18 is the same as the width w2 of the case 10.
  • the width w2 of the case 10 can be made equal to the width of the attachment 30.
  • the width w1 of the second convex portion may be smaller than the width (length in the Y-axis direction) of the holding portion 71 of the carriage 70, which will be described later.
  • the width w2 of the case 10 may be the same as the width of the holding portion 71.
  • the width of the opening 15 can be increased, so that clogging of parts at the opening 15 can be suppressed.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the second convex portion 18 may be a rectangular shape or a T-shaped shape (T-shaped slot shape). Since the cross-sectional shape of the second convex portion 18 is T-shaped, the case 10 can be fixed in the vertical direction (Z-axis direction) as well.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the second convex portion 18 is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a wedge shape (a wedge shape that tapers toward the minus side of the Z axis) or any other shape. good.
  • the notch portion 19 is formed on both end sides (Y-axis plus side and Y-minus side) of the lower surface of the case 10 when viewed from the longitudinal direction of the case 10 has been described, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be formed only on one end side, or may be formed at a central position in the Y-axis direction.
  • the RF tag T2 stores information about the parts housed in the case 10 to which the RF tag T2 is attached.
  • the RF tag T2 stores, for example, tag information such as information indicating the type of parts (identification information), information indicating the quantity (remaining number), and information indicating the expiration date.
  • the RF tag T2 may be attached to the case 10 already when the case 10 is delivered from the component manufacturer, for example. As a result, by storing the delivered case 10 in the parts storage W, it is possible to acquire information about the parts of the case 10 via the reader / writer RW. Information such as a warehousing date and a control number may be written in the RF tag T2 by the reader / writer of the parts storage W.
  • the case 10 having no remaining amount may be transported to the disposal area after being processed so that the information stored in the RF tag T2 cannot be read. This makes it possible to prevent parts from being mixed due to reuse of the case 10.
  • the RF tag T2 is an example of a second RF tag.
  • the feeder 20 has a case 10 detachably attached (for example, detachable), an attachment 30 for transporting parts, and a feeder main body 40 to which the attachment 30 is detachably attached. And have. It can be said that the feeder 20 includes a feeder main body 40 and an attachment 30 having an attached portion 32 that is removable from the feeder main body 40 and to which the case 10 is detachably attached. Further, it can be said that the feeder 20 can be separated into the attachment 30 and the feeder main body 40. For example, when the transport unit for transporting parts (corresponding to the transport portion 34 of the present embodiment) and the feeder main body portion (corresponding to the feeder main body portion of the present embodiment) are integrated, regardless of the type of parts.
  • the transport unit for transporting parts corresponding to the transport portion 34 of the present embodiment
  • the feeder main body portion corresponding to the feeder main body portion of the present embodiment
  • the transport unit is shared.
  • the parts used in the previous production may remain in the transport unit, and the parts of the case newly attached to the feeder (corresponding to the feeder 20 of the present embodiment) and the parts remaining in the transport unit. And may be mixed.
  • Such a mixture tends to be a problem especially when the parts supplied by the feeder 20 are changed to different types of parts for production.
  • the attachment 30 having the transport portion 34 and the feeder main body portion 40 can be separated. Therefore, by providing the transport portion 34 (attachment 30) exclusively for the parts, the feeder 20 can be used.
  • the feeder 20 can suppress mixing even when the size of the component is small.
  • the feeder 20 has a long shape, and the longitudinal direction is the X-axis direction.
  • the attachment 30 includes a mounted portion 32, a cover 32a, a rod body 33, a transport portion 34, a cover 35, a claw portion 37, and a convex portion 38. It has a guide unit 39 (see FIG. 9) and an RF tag T3.
  • the mounted portion 32 and the transport portion 34 are integrally formed.
  • an opening 32b is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 15 of the case 10, and an opening 35a is formed at a position where a component is taken out by the mounting head 107.
  • the rod body 33 is an example of an acting unit that moves along the X-axis direction by a driving unit 45 provided in the feeder main body 40 and acts on the cover 11 provided in the opening 15 of the case 10.
  • the mounted portion 32 is a portion to which the case 10 is attached and detached, fixes the case 10, and opens and closes the cover 11 of the case 10.
  • the mounted portion 32 is provided with a cover 32a, a rod body 33, a claw portion 37, and a guide portion 39.
  • the cover 32a covers the opening 32b to prevent other parts from being mixed into the attachment 30.
  • the cover 32a is provided between the opening 15 and the transport portion 34.
  • the cover 32a covers the opening 32b when the case 10 is not attached to the attachment 30.
  • the cover 32a is opened when the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 and the case 10 is collated as to whether the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 and the collation is successful.
  • the cover 32a may be opened and closed by, for example, the drive unit 45.
  • the cover 32a may be closed when the attachment 30 to which the case 10 is attached is removed from the feeder main body 40. As a result, it is possible to prevent the parts of the case 10 from invading the transport unit 34.
  • the mounted portion 32 has a cover 32a provided in the opening 32b formed at a position corresponding to the opening 15 of the case 10 in a state where the case 10 is mounted on the mounted portion 32.
  • the cover 32a is an example of the second cover.
  • the rod body 33 is an example of an opening / closing mechanism for opening / closing the cover 11.
  • the cover 11 is rotated around the rotation axis J by pressing the cover 11 to open / close the cover 11.
  • the rod body 33 is arranged, for example, at a position where one end portion 11a of the cover 11 can be pressed.
  • the shape of the rod 33 is not particularly limited. Further, when the rod body 33 does not press the one end portion 11a, it is preferable that the rod body 33 is housed inside the mounted portion 32. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rod body 33 from coming into contact with the one end portion 11a when the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 or the like.
  • the attachment 30 has an opening / closing mechanism for opening / closing the cover 11 of the case 10.
  • the claw portion 37 is a convex portion provided at a position where the lower surface of the case 10 in the mounted portion 32 comes into contact with the case 10 in order to fix the case 10 to the attachment 30.
  • the claw portion 37 engages with the engaging portion 13 of the case 10 to fix the case 10 to the attachment 30.
  • the claw portion 37 can be moved between the first position accommodated in the mounted portion 32 and the second position protruding from the mounted portion 32. That is, the claw portion 37 can move in the Z-axis direction.
  • FIG. 4 shows an example in which the claw portion 37 is fixed at the second position.
  • the movement of the claw portion 37 between the first position and the second position may be performed by, for example, the drive unit 45 or an elastic body such as a spring.
  • the shape of the claw portion 37 when viewed from the Y-axis direction is, for example, a triangle, and in FIG. 4, it is a right triangle. Even if the claw portion 37 is formed, for example, when viewed from the Y-axis direction, the inclination increases toward the opening 32b side (in the example of FIG. 4, the hypotenuse of the right triangle rises to the right). good.
  • the guide portion 39 functions as a guide when the case 10 is fixedly attached to the attachment 30 and the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 in a state where the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30.
  • the guide portion 39 is configured to include a support portion 39a that supports both ends of the case 10 in the width direction, and a groove portion 39b between the support portions 39a. As shown in FIG. 9, when the support portion 39a supports the lower surface of the case 10, the second convex portion 18 projecting from the lower surface of the case 10 engages with the guide portion 39.
  • the support portion 39a has a shape corresponding to the notch portion 19.
  • the width w3 of the groove portion 39b is shorter than the width w2 of the case 10.
  • the support portion 39a is provided so as to project from both ends of the mounted portion 32 toward the Z-axis plus side when viewed from the X-axis direction.
  • the transport unit 34 transports the parts supplied from the case 10 to the position where they are taken out by the mounting head 107.
  • the transport unit 34 transports the parts by the vibration generated by the vibration generation unit 41.
  • the transport unit 34 is an example of a component transport unit.
  • FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the transfer of the component P by the transfer unit 34 according to the present embodiment.
  • FIG. 10 shows a state when the transport unit 34 is viewed from the Z-axis plus side.
  • the transport unit 34 transports the component P so that the component P supplied from the case 10 is aligned toward the opening 35a.
  • the transport unit 34 has a guide portion 34a for aligning the parts P, and the parts P are transported along the guide portion 34a by the vibration from the vibration generating unit 41.
  • Align P Alignment here means that the parts P have the same orientation and are arranged in a row.
  • the transport unit 34 does not have to align the parts P as long as it can be taken out by the mounting head 107 even if the parts P are not aligned.
  • the transport unit 34 does not have to have the guide unit 34a.
  • the cover 35 covers the opening 35a.
  • the cover 35 is opened when the component is taken out by the mounting head 107.
  • the cover 35 is opened after the covers 11 and 32a are opened.
  • the opening and closing of the cover 35 may be performed by, for example, the drive unit 45.
  • FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a state in which the cover 35 of the attachment 30 according to the present embodiment is open.
  • FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a state in which the cover 35 of the attachment 30 according to the present embodiment is closed.
  • FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a state in which the cover 35 of the attachment 30 according to the present embodiment is closed and locked.
  • the cover 35 slides in the plus direction of the X-axis to open the cover 35. That is, the parts are exposed from the opening 35a. In this state, the mounting head 107 takes out the parts conveyed to the position of the opening 35a.
  • the surface of the attachment 30 on the plus side of the Y-axis is formed with a first portion 30a, a second portion 30b, and a third portion 30c having different thicknesses in the minus direction of the Y-axis.
  • the first portion 30a is a surface that comes into contact with the inner surface of the cover 35 when the cover 35 slides.
  • the second portion 30b is a portion thicker than the first portion 30a.
  • the third portion 30c is a portion thicker than the second portion 30b.
  • the first portion 30a, the second portion 30b, and the third portion 30c are formed in a staircase pattern.
  • the first portion 30a, the second portion 30b, and the third portion 30c may be formed on at least one of the Y-axis plus side surface and the Y-axis minus side surface of the attachment 30.
  • the opening 35a is closed by sliding the cover 35 in the minus direction of the X-axis. That is, the cover 35 changes from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the contact portion 35b of the cover 35 comes into contact with the second portion 30b, so that the movement in the minus direction of the X axis is restricted.
  • the cover 35 is formed so as to cover the opening 35a in a state where the contact portion 35b is in contact with the second portion 30b. At this time, the cover 35 is in a movable state in the plus direction of the X hour axis. That is, the state in which the contact portion 35b is in contact with the second portion 30b is a state in which the cover 35 can be easily opened.
  • the cover 35 is in a state of functioning as a shutter so that the parts in the transport portion 34 do not pop out. For example, when the cover 35 needs to be opened and closed frequently, the states shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B are repeated. For example, while the mounting head 107 does not take out the component, the state transitions from the open state to the state shown in FIG. 11B.
  • the cover 35 further slides (pushes in) in the minus direction of the X-axis from the state shown in FIG. 11B, so that the contact portion 35b comes into contact with the third portion 30c.
  • the cover 35 since the cover 35 and the second portion 30b are in contact with each other, the cover 35 cannot be easily moved. That is, the cover 35 cannot be easily opened. It can be said that the cover 35 functions as a lid for covering the opening 35a.
  • the state transitions to the state shown in FIG. 11C.
  • the transition of the state of the cover 35 shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C is executed by the first control device 50a.
  • the engaging portion 36 is a recess formed in the lower surface (Z-axis minus side surface) of the attachment 30 for fixing the attachment 30 to the feeder main body 40. be.
  • the engaging portion 36 is provided at a position corresponding to the claw portion 43 provided in the feeder main body portion 40, and engages with the claw portion 43. That is, the attachment 30 is fixed to the feeder main body 40 by engaging the engaging portion 36 and the claw portion 43.
  • the convex portion 38 is a portion gripped by the robot arm 61 when the transfer robot 60 attaches the attachment 30 to the feeder main body portion 40 of the supply unit 80.
  • the convex portion 38 is provided, for example, so as to project from the wall surface on the minus side of the X axis of the attachment 30 toward the minus side of the X axis.
  • the convex portion 38 may have a positioning portion that determines a gripping position when the robot arm 61 grips the convex portion 38.
  • the positioning portion is, for example, a pair of recesses formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the convex portion 38.
  • the convex portion 38 may be formed with a positioning portion such as the positioning portion 14a of the first convex portion 14.
  • the RF tag T3 stores tag information such as identification information of the attachment 30, usage history, and parts corresponding to the attachment 30. Further, when the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30, the RF tag T3 may store information about the parts of the case 10. That is, at least a part of the information stored in the RF tag T2 may be stored in the RF tag T3. Information such as a warehousing date and a control number may be written in the RF tag T3 via the reader / writer of the parts storage W.
  • the attachment 30 will be described, for example, exclusively provided for each type of component, that is, an example in which the component and the attachment 30 are associated with each other, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
  • the rod body 33 (acting portion) is provided on the mounted portion 32 to open and close the cover 11 of the case 10
  • the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the rod body 33 is provided in the case 10
  • the case 10 is attached to the mounted portion 32, and then the rod body 33 presses the cover 32a of the mounted portion 32 to open and close the cover 32a.
  • the acting portion provided on the case 10 may open and close the cover 32a of the mounted portion 32.
  • the cover 11 is opened and closed by the rod body 33 after the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 and collated, but the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 in conjunction with the case.
  • the cover 11 of 10 may be opened and closed. For example, it can be realized by projecting the rod body 33 from the mounted portion 32 in advance when the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30.
  • the feeder main body 40 is an object to which the attachment 30 is detachably attached. In other words, the feeder main body 40 is detachably attached to the mounted portion 32 and the transport portion 34.
  • the feeder main body 40 has a vibration generating portion 41, a claw portion 43, a convex portion 44, a driving portion 45, and an RF tag T1.
  • the feeder main body 40 is an accommodating body that accommodates the vibration generating portion 41, the claw portion 43, the RF tag T1, and the like, and is, for example, a box shape.
  • the vibration generating unit 41 vibrates the attachment 30 to convey the parts to the opening 35a.
  • the vibration generating unit 41 vibrates the attachment 30 along the X-axis direction, for example, but the attachment 30 is not limited to this, and any vibration condition may be used as long as the component can be conveyed to the opening 35a.
  • the vibration generating unit 41 can control the supply amount of the parts supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30 depending on the vibration conditions. The vibration conditions may be determined according to the supply amount of the parts.
  • the vibration generating unit 41 is realized by, for example, an actuator (oscillator).
  • the claw portion 43 is a convex portion provided at a position where the lower surface of the attachment 30 comes into contact with the attachment 30 in order to fix the attachment 30 to the feeder main body portion 40.
  • the claw portion 43 engages with the engaging portion 36 of the attachment 30 to fix the attachment 30 to the feeder main body portion 40.
  • the claw portion 43 is movable between a third position housed in the feeder main body 40 and a fourth position protruding from the feeder main body 40. That is, the claw portion 43 may be movable in the Z-axis direction. In FIG. 4, the claw portion 37 is fixed at the fourth position.
  • the movement of the claw portion 43 from the third position to the fourth position may be performed by, for example, a drive portion (not shown) included in the feeder main body portion 40.
  • the convex portion 44 is a portion gripped by the robot arm 61 when the transfer robot 60 attaches the feeder main body portion 40 to the carriage 70 of the supply unit 80.
  • the convex portion 44 is provided, for example, so as to project from the wall surface on the negative side of the X axis of the feeder main body 40 to the negative side of the X axis.
  • the convex portion 44 may have a positioning portion that determines a gripping position when the robot arm 61 grips the convex portion 44.
  • the positioning portion is, for example, a pair of recesses formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the convex portion 44. That is, the convex portion 44 may be formed with a positioning portion such as the positioning portion 14a of the first convex portion 14.
  • the drive unit 45 moves the rod body 33 provided on the mounted portion 32 to which the case 10 of the attachment 30 is mounted along the X-axis direction under the control of the first control device 50a. It can be said that the drive unit 45 moves the rod body 33 in and out of the mounted unit 32.
  • the drive unit 45 changes the cover 11 from the closed state to the open state by physically acting the rod body 33 on the cover 11 while the case 10 is mounted on the mounted portion 32. Further, the drive unit 45 stops the rod body 33 from physically acting on the cover 11 while the case 10 is mounted on the mounted portion 32, so that the rod body 33 comes into contact with the cover 11, for example.
  • the cover 11 is changed from the open state to the closed state by transitioning from the state of being in contact to the state of not being in contact.
  • the drive unit 45 is realized by, for example, an actuator.
  • the rod body 33 that physically acts on the cover 11 is driven by the drive unit 45 provided in the feeder main body 40.
  • the case main body portion 12 has a cover 17 in which one end portion 11a of the cover 11 is covered from the outer side of the case 10 and a through hole 17a through which the rod body 33 can be inserted is formed. That is, in the mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation for closing and opening the cover 11 cannot be performed from the outside of the feeder 20, and the cover 11 can be opened and closed by an erroneous operation of the operator or the transfer robot 60. Can be suppressed.
  • the cover 11 cannot be opened or closed unless the case 10 and the attachment 30 are attached to the feeder main body 40, and the operator or the transfer robot 60 can be used. It is possible to suppress the opening and closing of the cover 11 due to an erroneous operation.
  • the RF tag T1 stores information such as identification information and usage history of the feeder main body 40. Information such as a warehousing date and a control number may be written in the RF tag T1 via a reader / writer of the parts storage W. The RF tag T1 may be built in the feeder main body 40. The RF tag T1 is an example of the first RF tag.
  • the integrated control device 50 sends an instruction to the first control device 50a and the second control device 50b.
  • the first control device 50a controls each component of the mounting system 1.
  • the integrated control device 50 has a control unit 51 and a storage unit 52.
  • the control unit 51 sends an instruction to the first control device 50a and the second control device 50b.
  • the control unit 51 outputs, for example, an instruction regarding production on the mounting line 90 to the first control device 50a. Further, the control unit 51 outputs, for example, an instruction (for example, a supply request) regarding the supply of parts to the second control device 50b. Further, the control unit 51 collates the tag information acquired from the reader 130 and the reader / writer RW, performs various determination processes, and the like.
  • the first control device 50a is communicably connected to the vibration generation unit 41, the drive unit 45, the mounting head 107, the power supply unit 111, the reading device 130, and the component detection unit 141, and each is based on an instruction from the integrated control device 50. Control the components.
  • the second control device 50b is communicably connected to the transfer robot 60 and controls the transfer robot 60 based on an instruction from the integrated control device 50.
  • the first control device 50a controls the drive unit 45 to move the rod body 33 in and out.
  • the first control device 50a controls the drive unit 45 and pushes the rod body 33 toward the minus side of the X-axis to open the cover 11 of the case 10 attached to the attachment 30. Further, the first control device 50a controls the drive unit 45 to return the rod body 33 to the X-axis plus side, and closes the cover 11 of the case 10 attached to the attachment 30.
  • the first control device 50a controls the vibration generating unit 41 when the component is conveyed to a position where the mounting head 107 can be taken out, and vibrates the attachment 30. This vibration is also transmitted to, for example, the case 10. As a result, parts are supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30, and the parts are conveyed to the opening 35a by vibration. It can be said that the first control device 50a conveys the parts supplied from the opening 15 of the case 10 to the attachment 30 to the opening 35a via the conveying portion 34 of the attachment 30 by the vibration of the vibration generating portion 41. Further, the first control device 50a may control the power supply unit 111 to supply electric power to the vibration generating unit 41, the driving unit 45, and the like as needed.
  • control unit 51 controls the reading device 130 attached to the trolley 70, and is stored in the RF tags T1 to T4 from each of the case 10, the attachment 30, and the feeder main body 40 attached to the trolley 70. By acquiring the tag information, it is confirmed whether the case 10, the attachment 30, and the feeder main body 40 attached to the trolley 70 are correct. Further, the control unit 51 can confirm the arrangement error or the like in advance by performing the above confirmation on the supply unit 80 prepared in the preparation area A2, for example. Further, the control unit 51 can also acquire tag information from the RF tag T4 of the roll body case 120 stored in the standby area A21 (empty space) of the carriage 70. The parts stored in the empty space of the carriage 70 are not limited to the roll body case 120.
  • the first control device 50a controls the mounting head 107 to take out the parts conveyed to the opening 35a and mount them on the object. At this time, the first control device 50a may count the number of parts mounted on the object by the mounting head 107.
  • the RF tag T1 stores tag information such as usage history and identification information of the feeder main body 40.
  • the RF tag T4 stores tag information including information about parts housed in the roll body case 120 to which the RF tag T4 is attached.
  • the roll body case 120 accommodates, for example, a tape roll body in which a carrier tape is rolled into a roll shape.
  • the integrated control device 50 may instruct the second control device 50b to prepare in advance the supply unit 80 to be used in the next production, for example, based on the production data.
  • the second control device 50b acquires, for example, information about the parts used in the next production based on the production data, and stores the case 10 for accommodating the acquired parts and the attachment 30 corresponding to the case 10 in the parts storage.
  • the transfer robot 60 is controlled so as to transfer from W to the preparation area A2.
  • the second control device 50b has a plurality of cases 10 accommodating parts used in the next production, for example, even if the case 10 having a larger inventory than the number of parts used in the next production is conveyed by the transfer robot 60. good.
  • By acquiring information about parts from each of the plurality of cases 10 by the second control device 50b via the reader / writer RW it is possible to identify the case 10 in which the inventory is larger than the number of parts used for the next production. ..
  • the second control device 50b may attach a single case 10 accommodating parts to be used in the next production to the attachment 30 corresponding to the case 10, and convey the attachment 30 to which the case 10 is attached to the transfer robot 60. If the attachment 30 to which the case 10 is already attached is stored, the attachment 30 may be conveyed to the transfer robot 60. When the attachment 30 to which the case 10 is already attached is stored, the remaining number of cases 10 used in the past production is a predetermined number or more, and the attachment 30 to which the case 10 is attached from the mounting line 90 is in that state. This is the case when the parts are stored in the parts storage W as they are.
  • the second control device 50b attaches the case 10 and the attachment 30 conveyed by the transfer robot 60 to the feeder main body 40 previously arranged on the carriage 70. Specifically, the second control device 50b attaches the attachment 30 to the feeder main body 40.
  • the storage unit 52 stores various programs for the control unit 51 to perform the above control, production data for producing the mounting board, acquired RF tag T information, information indicating the correspondence between the component and the attachment 30, and the like.
  • the storage unit 52 is realized by, for example, a semiconductor memory, but is not limited thereto.
  • the production data is, for example, a table in which the type and number of parts to be used, the arrangement of the case 10 on the trolley 70, and the like are associated with each other.
  • the dolly 70 is configured to be removable from the main body of the component mounting device 100.
  • the main body of the component mounting device 100 is, for example, a part of the component mounting device 100 excluding the carriage 70.
  • the dolly 70 has a holding portion 71 for holding the feeder 20, a dolly main body portion for supporting the holding portion 71, and a reading device 130.
  • the carriage 70 has, for example, a plurality of holding portions 71, and the plurality of holding portions 71 are arranged on the carriage main body portion along the Y-axis direction. In this case, each of the plurality of holding portions 71 holds the feeder 20.
  • the reading device 130 is provided in each of the plurality of holding portions 71.
  • the holding portion 71 is also referred to as, for example, a feeder slot.
  • the dolly 70 is an example of a feeder arrangement portion.
  • the reading device 130 reads the tag information of the feeder 20 held in the holding unit 71 in which the reading device 130 is arranged and the case 10 fixed to the feeder 20. Specifically, the reading device 130 has an RF tag T2 attached to the case 10, an RF tag T3 attached to the attachment 30, and an RF tag T1 attached to the feeder main body 40. Read the tag information from each. Further, when the object is in the standby area A21 of the carriage 70, the reading device 130 may read the tag information about the object from the RF tag (an example of the fourth RF tag) attached to the object. .. In the example of FIG. 3, the roll body case 120 is stored in the standby area A21, and the RF tag T4 is attached to the roll body case 120. The reading device 130 may also read the tag information from the RF tag T4. The RF tag T4 is an example of a fourth RF tag.
  • the object waiting in the standby area A21 is an object related to the production of the mounting system 1, and may be, for example, a feeder, a case, or a tape feeder.
  • the tape feeder supplies the parts from the parts tape containing the parts.
  • the object may be a tray feeder, a stick fee, a bulk feeder, or the like.
  • the tray feeder supplies the parts from the tray containing the parts.
  • the stick feeder supplies the parts from the stick case containing the parts.
  • the tag information read by the reading device 130 is output to the integrated control device 50 via the first control device 50a.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view for explaining the arrangement of the antenna and the RF tag according to the present embodiment.
  • the reading device 130 has a reading unit 131, a switching unit 132, and antennas a1 to a7.
  • the reading unit 131 reads tag information from each RF tag via the antennas a1 to a7.
  • the reading unit 131 reads tag information from the RF tag corresponding to the antenna via the antenna selected by the switching unit 132.
  • the reading unit 131 is realized by, for example, a reader / writer that reads tag information from each RF tag.
  • the switching unit 132 selects antennas a1 to a7 connected to the reading unit 131 in order to switch the RF tag on which the reading unit 131 reads the tag information. It can also be said that the switching unit 132 selects an antenna that can read the tag information from the RF tag in order to read the tag information from the RF tag to be read.
  • Antenna a1 is an antenna provided on the carriage 70 and capable of transmitting and receiving signals to the RF tag T1.
  • the antenna a1 is arranged in the vicinity of the RF tag T1 so as to face the RF tag T1.
  • the antenna a1 and the switching unit 132 are connected by, for example, a cable C1.
  • the antenna a1 is an example of the first antenna.
  • the antenna a2 is an antenna provided on the carriage 70 and capable of transmitting and receiving signals to and from the RF tag T2.
  • the antenna a2 and the switching unit 132 are connected by, for example, a cable C2.
  • the antenna a1 is an example of the second antenna.
  • the antenna a3 is provided on the feeder 20 and is arranged so as to face the RF tag T2. Specifically, the antenna a3 is arranged in the feeder main body 40. More specifically, the antenna a3 is arranged on the surface of the feeder main body 40 on the attachment 30 side. That is, the antenna a3 is arranged in the vicinity of the RF tag T2.
  • the antenna a3 is an example of the third antenna.
  • the antenna a3 may transmit a signal including the tag information stored in the RF tag T2 to the RF tag T3. That is, the antenna a3 may be capable of transmitting and receiving signals to and from each of the RF tag T2 and the RF tag T3.
  • the antenna a4 is provided on the feeder 20 and is arranged so as to face the antenna a2. Specifically, the antenna a4 is arranged in the feeder main body 40. More specifically, the antenna a4 is arranged on the surface of the feeder main body 40 opposite to the attachment 30. The antenna a4 is arranged in the vicinity of the antenna a2 so as to face the antenna a2. The antenna a4 is an example of the fourth antenna. Further, the antenna a3 and the antenna a4 are connected by, for example, a cable C3. The cable C3 is housed in the feeder main body 40.
  • the antenna a4 is arranged so as to face the antenna a2 to form a coupled antenna. That is, the antenna a4 and the antenna a2 are arranged so as to be electromagnetically coupled. An object that obstructs the propagation of electromagnetic waves, such as metal, is not placed between the antenna a4 and the antenna a2. For example, a space may or may not exist between the antenna a4 and the antenna a2.
  • the antenna a2 can send and receive signals to and from the RF tag T2 via the antenna a4, the cable C3, and the antenna a3.
  • the antenna a4, the cable C3, and the antenna a3 are examples of a transmission unit that transmits the signal of the antenna a2.
  • the antenna a5 is provided on the carriage 70 and is an antenna capable of transmitting and receiving signals to the RF tag T3.
  • the antenna a5 and the switching unit 132 are connected by, for example, a cable C4.
  • the antenna a5 is an example of the fifth antenna.
  • the antenna a6 is provided on the feeder 20 and is arranged so as to face the RF tag T3. Specifically, the antenna a6 is arranged in the feeder main body 40. More specifically, the antenna a6 is arranged on the surface of the feeder main body 40 on the attachment 30 side. That is, the antenna a6 is arranged in the vicinity of the RF tag T3. In the present embodiment, the antenna a6 and the antenna a3 are arranged at positions where they do not overlap in a plan view, but the antenna a6 and the antenna a3 may be arranged so that at least a part of them overlap in a plan view. good.
  • the antenna a7 is provided on the feeder 20 and is arranged so as to face the antenna a5. Specifically, the antenna a7 is arranged on the feeder main body 40. More specifically, the antenna a7 is arranged on the surface of the feeder main body 40 opposite to the attachment 30. The antenna a7 is arranged in the vicinity of the antenna a5. The antenna a6 and the antenna a7 are connected by, for example, a cable C5. The cable C5 is housed in the feeder main body 40.
  • the antenna a7 is arranged so as to face the antenna a5 to form a coupled antenna.
  • the antenna a5 can transmit and receive signals to and from the RF tag T3 via the antenna a7, the cable C5, and the antenna a6.
  • the antenna a7, the cable C5, and the antenna a6 are examples of a transmission unit that transmits the signal of the antenna a5.
  • the antenna arranged on the carriage 70 and the antenna arranged on the feeder main body 40 form a coupled antenna. Further, the antenna in the feeder main body 40 is connected by using a cable. If the two antennas in the feeder main body 40 can be arranged so as to be electromagnetically coupled, it is not necessary to use a cable for connection.
  • Cables C1 to C5 are, for example, coaxial cables, but are not limited thereto. Further, for example, cables and antennas are not arranged in the case 10 and the attachment 30.
  • the RF tag T2 arranged in the case 10 and the RF tag T3 arranged in the attachment 30 are arranged so that at least a part thereof does not overlap in a plan view.
  • the RF tag T2 and the RF tag T3 may be arranged so that at least a part of the RF tag T2 and the RF tag T3 do not overlap in the plan view, for example, in the longitudinal direction of the feeder 20.
  • the RF tag T2 and the RF tag T3 are arranged at positions that do not overlap each other in a plan view.
  • the two RF tags may overlap if at least one antenna is arranged between the two RF tags.
  • the RF tag T1 and the RF tag T2 overlap each other in a plan view, but since the antenna a3 is arranged between the RF tag T1 and the RF tag T2, there is no problem in reading.
  • the reading device 130 When an object such as a roll case 120 is stored in the standby area A21, the reading device 130 provides an antenna (not shown) capable of transmitting and receiving signals to the RF tag T4 attached to the object. You may have.
  • the antenna is provided on the carriage 70 and is arranged so as to face the antenna in the vicinity of the RF tag T4.
  • the antenna is an example of the sixth antenna.
  • the sensor 140 detects the parts supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30 in a non-contact manner.
  • the sensor 140 may be any existing sensor as long as it can detect the component in a non-contact manner.
  • the sensor 140 may be, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. In the case of an optical sensor, the sensor 140 outputs to the component detection unit 141 according to the amount of light received by the light receiving unit.
  • the sensor 140 is provided, for example, inside the mounted portion 32, in the vicinity of the opening 32b, but is not limited to this, and may be provided in the vicinity of the opening 15 of the case 10.
  • the component detection unit 141 receives the output of the sensor 140 and detects the presence or absence of components. It can be said that the component detection unit 141 receives the output of the sensor 140 and detects whether or not the component is supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30. Further, the component detection unit 141 may detect the number of components supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30, or may detect whether or not the components are supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30.
  • the component detection unit 141 is provided in, for example, the component mounting device 100.
  • FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an operation of exchanging the case 10 of the mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment.
  • the flowchart shown in FIG. 13 is performed during production (parts are being mounted on the substrate 103). That is, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 13, in the mounting process in which the parts in the feeder 20 are held by the mounting head 107 and mounted on the board 103, the parts are mounted on the board 103 continuously in time. Will be executed. That is, the following operations are executed in parallel with the mounting process.
  • the first control device 50a causes the feeder 20 to supply the parts in the case 10 (S101). Specifically, the first control device 50a vibrates the vibration generating unit 41 to supply parts having a supply amount corresponding to the vibration to the feeder 20 (attachment 30 in the present embodiment).
  • the first control device 50a acquires the remaining number of parts in the case 10 (S102).
  • the first control device 50a includes, for example, the number of parts (initial number) in the case 10 acquired from the RF tag T2 attached to the case 10 when the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30, and in the mounting process.
  • the remaining number is obtained by calculating the remaining number of parts in the case 10 at the present time based on the number of parts supplied to the attachment 30.
  • the number of parts supplied to the attachment 30 can be obtained, for example, by the detection result of the sensor 140 installed near the opening 32b of the attachment 30. In this way, the first control device 50a also functions as a confirmation unit for confirming the remaining number of parts.
  • the method of acquiring the remaining number of parts by the first control device 50a is not limited to the above, and is based on, for example, the initial number of parts and the number of parts mounted (used) by the mounting head 107. It may be calculated. For example, the first control device 50a calculates the number of parts supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30 based on the number of parts mounted in the mounting process (for example, the number of times the mounting head 107 has performed the mounting operation). May be good. Further, the method of acquiring the remaining number of parts by the first control device 50a may be calculated based on the initial number of parts in the case 10 and the mounting time. In this case, the sensor 140 may not be provided.
  • the first control device 50a determines that the remaining number of the cases 10 is zero when the parts are no longer supplied. You may. In this case, the first control device 50a can acquire the remaining number of parts in the case 10 based on the detection result from the sensor 140. Specifically, the first control device 50a can acquire that the remaining number of parts in the case 10 has become zero based on the detection result from the sensor 140.
  • the first control device 50a determines whether or not there is a remaining number of parts in the case 10 based on the remaining number of parts in the case 10 acquired in step S102 (S103).
  • the first control device 50a may determine in step S103 whether or not the remaining number of parts in the case 10 has become zero, and whether or not the remaining number of parts in the case 10 has become a predetermined number or less. May be determined.
  • the predetermined number is set in advance and stored in the storage unit 52, for example.
  • the first control device 50a proceeds to step S104 when there is no remaining number of parts in the case 10 (No in S103). That is, the first control device 50a proceeds to step S104 when the remaining number of parts in the case 10 becomes zero or when the remaining number of parts in the case 10 becomes a predetermined number or less. Further, when there is a remaining number of parts in the case 10 (Yes in S103), the first control device 50a returns to step S101 and continues to supply the parts. That is, the first control device 50a maintains the open state of the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the attachment 30 based on the remaining number acquired in step S102. It can be said that the first control device 50a maintains the state in which the cover 11 is opened when there are remaining parts in the case 10.
  • the first control device 50a determines in step S103 based on, for example, the remaining number of parts in the attachment 30 (for example, in the transport unit 34) or the detection result indicating that the parts remain in the attachment 30. You may go. In this case, when the first control device 50a acquires the information indicating that there are a predetermined number or more of parts in the attachment 30 or the parts remain in the attachment 30, it is determined as Yes in step S103.
  • the information may be, for example, the detection result of the sensor 140.
  • the sensor 140 may be arranged in the middle of the transport unit 34, for example. For example, the sensor 140 may be provided in the transport unit 34 so as to be able to detect whether or not there is a supply of parts from the upstream side (case 10 side) of the transport unit 34.
  • steps S101 to S103 may be executed as part of the mounting process.
  • the first control device 50a changes the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the attachment 30 from the open state to the closed state (S104). That is, the first control device 50a changes the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the attachment 30 from the open state to the closed state based on the remaining number acquired in step S102. It can be said that the first control device 50a closes the cover 11 when there are no remaining parts in the case 10.
  • step S104 parts still remain in the transport unit 34 of the attachment 30. Therefore, the steps after step S104 can be executed in parallel with the mounting step. That is, the case 10 can be replaced while holding the parts in the transport unit 34 and mounting them on the substrate 103.
  • step S104 the cover 11 of the case 10 does not have to be closed. That is, in step S104, the cover 32a of the attachment 30 may be closed. In this case, the opening 32b of the mounted portion 32 in the state where the case 10 is removed from the mounted portion 32 of the feeder 20 is closed by the cover 32a.
  • the second control device 50b causes the transfer robot 60 to replace the case 10 by outputting a supply instruction (S105).
  • the transfer robot 60 conveys the case 10 containing the parts having no remaining number from the storage area A1 or the preparation area A2 to the position of the case 10 having no remaining number, and replaces the case 10.
  • the replenishment instruction may include information for specifying the case 10 to be transported from the storage area A1 or the preparation area A2, and information for specifying the position for exchanging the case 10 (for example, the position of the feeder 20). ..
  • FIG. 14 is a diagram showing how the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 according to the present embodiment.
  • the case 10 shown in FIG. 14 is moved by the transfer robot 60, but the transfer robot 60 is not shown.
  • FIG. 14 only the engaging portion 13 and the claw portion 37 are hidden by a broken line.
  • FIG. 14A shows a state in which a part of the case 10 is placed on the mounted portion 32 of the attachment 30. At this time, the claw portion 37 is in a second position protruding from the mounted portion 32.
  • FIG. 14B shows a state in which the case 10 is moved to the position of the claw portion 37 by the transfer robot 60.
  • the claw portion 37 is pushed by, for example, the case 10 and moves to the inside of the mounted portion 32. That is, the claw portion 37 moves to the first position accommodated in the mounted portion 32.
  • the movement of the claw portion 37 may be performed by the drive portion 45.
  • at least a part of the claw portion 37 may be accommodated in the mounted portion 32.
  • the position of the claw portion 37 in which at least a part thereof is housed in the mounted portion 32 is also included in the first position.
  • FIG. 14C shows a state in which the engaging portion 13 of the case 10 and the claw portion 37 are engaged and the case 10 is fixed to the attachment 30. At this time, the claw portion 37 is in the second position. In this state, the tag information of the RF tag T2 of the exchanged case 10 has not been collated. Therefore, it is preferable that the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the mounted portion 32 remain in the closed state. Not limited to this. As long as the case 10 is fixed to the attachment 30, the cover 32a of the mounted portion 32 may be in the open state.
  • the claw portion 37 is movable between the first position in which at least a part thereof is accommodated in the mounted portion 32 and the second position protruding from the mounted portion 32. Then, the claw portion 37 engages with the engaging portion 13 provided on the lower surface of the case 10 at the second position to fix the case 10 to the mounted portion 32.
  • the first position may be a position on the minus side of the Z axis from the second position.
  • the first control device 50a controls the reading device 130 to read the tag information of the replaced RF tag T2 of the case 10 (S106).
  • the first control device 50a controls the switching unit 132 to conduct the reading unit 131 and the antenna a2.
  • the reading unit 131 reads the tag information from the RF tag T2 via the antenna a2, and outputs the read tag information to the integrated control device 50 via the first control device 50a.
  • the integrated control device 50 can acquire the tag information of the RF tag T2 of the exchanged case 10.
  • the integrated control device 50 determines whether or not the replaced case is appropriate (S107).
  • the integrated control device 50 may determine, for example, whether or not the tag information acquired in step S106 matches the production data.
  • the integrated control device 50 may determine, for example, whether or not the type of the component included in the tag information and the type of the component corresponding to the feeder 20 included in the production data match. Further, the integrated control device 50 may determine whether the number of parts included in the tag information is equal to or larger than the number of parts required for production included in the production data. Matching in this case includes the quantity of parts satisfying the production data.
  • step S107 the determination may be made without using the production data.
  • the integrated control device 50 may make a determination in step S107 depending on whether or not the types of parts of the case 10 before and after replacement match. Further, in addition to the determination using the types of parts included in the production data, the determination in step S107 may be performed depending on whether or not the parts match the parts type of the attachment 30.
  • the integrated control device 50 proceeds to step S108 when the replaced case 10 is appropriate (Yes in S107). Further, when the replaced case 10 is not appropriate (No in S107), the integrated control device 50 returns to step S105 and causes the case to be replaced again. It should be noted that the determination of Yes in step S107 is an example of successful collation, and the determination of No in step S107 is an example of failure of collation.
  • the first control device 50a changes the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the attachment 30 from the closed state to the open state (S108). That is, the first control device 50a changes the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the attachment 30 from the closed state to the open state based on the determination result of step S107.
  • FIG. 14D shows a state in which the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the attachment 30 are changed from the closed state to the open state.
  • the first control device 50a collates the tag information of the exchanged case 10 with the production data, and when the collation is successful, for example, when the tag information and the production data match, the covers 11 and 32a Is opened, and the supply of parts to the attachment 30 is started.
  • the above steps S104 to S108 are examples of parts replenishment steps.
  • the parts supply step is executed with the parts remaining in the transport unit 34.
  • FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an operation of exchanging the case 10 and the feeder 20 of the mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 15 shows an operation of preparing a dolly 70 for replacement in the preparation area A2 in advance.
  • FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an operation of acquiring the tag information shown in FIG. FIG. 16 describes an example in which the RF tag is an RF tag for a long distance.
  • the RF tag for a long distance is, for example, an RF tag capable of communication of about 1 to 2 m.
  • the RF tag may be an RF tag for a short distance.
  • the RF tag for a short distance has a shorter communication distance than the RF tag for a long distance, for example, about several tens of centimeters.
  • the second control device 50b attaches the case 10 and the attachment 30 to the trolley 70 arranged in the preparation area A2 (S201).
  • the second control device 50b controls the transfer robot 60 to hold a case 10 for accommodating parts used in the next production and an attachment 30 corresponding to the case 10, based on, for example, production data. It is attached to the feeder main body 40. It is assumed that the feeder main body 40 is preliminarily attached to the feeder slot of the carriage 70.
  • a plurality of feeder main bodies 40 are attached to the carriage 70, and in step S201, a case 10 and an attachment 30 corresponding to the case 10 are attached to each of the plurality of feeder main bodies 40.
  • the antenna is arranged in each of the plurality of feeder main body portions 40.
  • the first control device 50a acquires the tag information stored in the RF tags T2 and T3 from each of the plurality of RF tags T2 and T3 (S202). Since the RF tags T2 and T3 are RF tags for long distances, the first control device 50a simultaneously acquires signals from each of the plurality of RF tags T2 and T3. Therefore, the first control device 50a cannot specify the RF tags T2 and T3 corresponding to the antenna a1 from the acquired tag information. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first control device 50a identifies the RF tags T2 and T3 corresponding to the antenna a1 based on the radio wave intensity of the signals received from each of the plurality of RF tags T2 and T3.
  • step S202 for example, at least one of the RF tags T2 and T3 may be acquired.
  • the control unit 51 of the integrated control device 50 may acquire the tag information stored in the RF tags T2 and T3 from each of the plurality of RF tags T2 and T3. That is, the tag information may be acquired by the first control device 50a or the control unit 51.
  • the first control device 50a acquires the radio wave intensity of the signal from each of the plurality of RF tags T2 (S301).
  • the first control device 50a calculates the radio wave strength (signal strength) of the signal based on the signal acquired from the RF tag T2.
  • the first control device 50a identifies the RF tag T2 corresponding to the antenna a1 based on the plurality of radio wave intensities (S302). Specifically, the first control device 50a determines that the RF tag T2 corresponding to the signal having the strongest radio field strength among the plurality of radio wave strengths is the RF tag T2 corresponding to the antenna a1.
  • FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram for explaining a process of specifying the RF tag T2 corresponding to the antenna a1.
  • the width of the double-headed arrow shown in FIG. 17 indicates the strength of the signal transmitted from each RF tag T2 to the antenna a1 arranged on the leftmost side. The larger the width, the higher the signal strength.
  • the radio field intensity changes according to the distance between the antenna a1 and the RF tag T2. Therefore, by specifying the RF tag T2 based on the radio wave strength, the RF tag T2 corresponding to the antenna a1 is specified. Can be specified accurately. In the example of FIG. 17, it can be seen that the RF tag T2 corresponding to the antenna a1 on the Y-axis plus side is the RF tag T2 on the Y-axis plus side.
  • each feeder 20 may be formed of metal.
  • the first control device 50a determines whether or not the RF tag T2 has been specified for all the antennas a1 (S303).
  • the first control device 50a proceeds to step S203 shown in FIG.
  • the first control device 50a returns to step S301 and continues the processing after step S301 for the remaining antennas a1. .. Specifically, the first control device 50a controls the switching unit 132 to switch the antenna a1 connected to the reading unit 131, and performs the processing after step S301 on the switched antenna a1.
  • the first control device 50a outputs the acquired tag information to the integrated control device 50.
  • the integrated control device 50 determines whether or not the case 10 and the attachment 30 attached to the feeder main body 40 are appropriate based on the tag information (S203).
  • the integrated control device 50 may make a determination in step S203, for example, by collating the tag information with the production data.
  • the types of parts included in the tag information of the case 10 and the attachment 30 attached to the feeder main body 40 and the types of parts attached to the feeder main body 40 included in the production data are different. If they match, the mounting positions of the case 10 and the attachment 30 are appropriate (the case 10 and the attachment 30 are attached to the appropriate feeder main body 40), so that the case 10 and the attachment 30 are determined to be appropriate. (Yes in S203).
  • the integrated control device 50 includes, for example, the types of parts included in the tag information of the case 10 and the attachment 30 attached to the feeder main body 40, and the parts attached to the feeder main body 40 included in the production data. If the types do not match, it is determined that the mounting positions of the case 10 and the attachment 30 are not appropriate (No in S203).
  • the integrated control device 50 makes a determination in step S203 in each of the feeder main body portions 40. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the attachment position of the attachment is appropriate may be performed without using the production data.
  • the integrated control device 50 may make a determination in step S203 depending on whether or not the component types of the tag information of the attachment 30 and the tag information of the case 10 match, for example. In addition, when determining whether or not the attachment position of the attachment is appropriate, the production data may be used in the same manner.
  • the first control device 50a opens the cover 32a on the case 10 side of the attachment 30 attached to the carriage 70 of the component mounting device 100 from the open state to the closed state. (S204). At this time, the first control device 50a may also change the cover 11 of the case 10 from the open state to the closed state.
  • the second control device 50b removes the trolley 70 of the component mounting device 100, and the trolley 70 determined to be Yes in step S203 in each of the feeder main body 40 (the trolley 70 in which the case 10 and the attachment 30 are appropriate). Is attached to the component mounting device 100 (S205).
  • the first control device 50a changes the cover 32a on the case side of the attachment 30 of the newly attached trolley 70 from the closed state to the open state (S206). At this time, in the first control device 50a, the cover 11 of the case 10 may also be changed from the closed state to the open state.
  • the feeder 20 having the attachment 30 for accommodating the parts supplied from the case 10 and the feeder 20 for accommodating the parts in a bulk state can be attached and detached.
  • the mounting method includes a mounting process in which the components in the feeder 20 are held by the mounting head 107 and mounted on the substrate 103, and a component replenishment step (S104 to S108) in which the case 10 is replaced with the components remaining in the attachment 30. ) And.
  • the case 10 is an example of the first accommodating portion
  • the attachment 30 is an example of the second accommodating portion.
  • the case 10 can be replaced with the parts remaining in the attachment 30 (specifically, the transport unit 34).
  • the case 10 can be replaced while continuing the mounting with the parts remaining inside the attachment 30. That is, when the case 10 is replaced, it is possible to suppress a decrease in productivity in the mounting process. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in productivity in the mounting process as compared with the case where the case 10 is replaced after the parts in the attachment 30 are exhausted.
  • the component supply process is executed while the components are mounted on the substrate 103 continuously in time in the mounting process.
  • the case 10 can be replaced while continuing the mounting process, that is, while mounting the components on the substrate 103 continuously in time. That is, the case 10 can be replaced without stopping the mounting process. Therefore, as compared with the case where the mounting process is stopped and the case 10 is replaced, the decrease in productivity can be suppressed more reliably.
  • the cover 11 provided in the opening 15 of the case 10 is opened and closed based on the output of the integrated control device 50 for confirming the remaining number of parts.
  • the integrated control device 50 is an example of a confirmation unit. Further, the output of the integrated control device 50 may be a determination result regarding the remaining number.
  • the cover 11 of the case 10 is opened and closed based on the remaining number of parts (for example, the remaining number of parts in the case 10 or the attachment 30). Therefore, for example, when the case 10 is replaced, other parts are added to the case 10. Can be suppressed from being mixed.
  • the cover 11 is opened and closed based on the type of parts housed in the case 10.
  • the cover 11 of the case can be kept closed, so that the part can be kept closed in the attachment 30. Can be suppressed from being mixed. That is, it is possible to suppress the corresponding work when the parts are mixed in the attachment 30. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in productivity due to such a corresponding work.
  • the opening 32b of the mounted portion 32 in a state where the case 10 is removed from the mounted portion 32 of the feeder 20 is closed by the cover 32a.
  • the case 10 for accommodating the bulk state parts is detachable, and the feeder 20 has the attachment 30 for accommodating the parts supplied from the case 10.
  • a mounting head 107 that holds the components supplied by the feeder 20 and mounts the components on the substrate 103, and a control unit 51 that controls the replacement of the case with the components remaining on the attachment 30 are provided.
  • the feeder 20 includes a mounted portion 32 to which a case 10 for accommodating bulk parts is detachably attached.
  • the mounted portion 32 has a rod body 33 that acts on the cover 11 provided in the opening 15 of the case 10.
  • the rod body 33 physically acts on the cover 11 in a state where the case 10 is mounted on the mounted portion 32, so that the cover 11 is opened from the closed state.
  • the case 10 is an example of the housing
  • the opening 15 is an example of the first opening
  • the cover 11 is an example of the first cover
  • the rod 33 is an example of the working part.
  • a rod body 33 for opening and closing the cover 11 is provided on the mounted portion 32 included in the feeder 20. Therefore, with the case 10 mounted on the mounted portion 32, the cover 11 can be opened by a physical action (for example, pressing) by the rod body 33. That is, the feeder 20 can open and close the cover 11 without driving the shutter opening / closing plate by the shutter opening / closing lever as in Patent Document 1. Therefore, according to the feeder 20 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability when opening and closing the cover 11.
  • the mounted portion 32 has a guide portion 39 that engages with a second convex portion 18 that is provided so as to project from the lower surface of the case 10.
  • the guide portion 39 has a support portion 39a that supports both ends of the case 10 in the width direction and a groove portion 39b provided between the support portions 39a, and the length (width w3) of the groove portion 39b in the width direction is set. It is shorter than the length of the case 10 in the width direction (width w2).
  • the second convex portion 18 is an example of the convex portion.
  • the width w2 of the case 10 can be widened as compared with the case where the second convex portion 18 is formed on the side surface of the case 10 (for example, the surface in the Y-axis direction), so that the component in the case 10 can be widened.
  • the mounted portion 32 has a claw portion 37 that can be moved between a first position housed in the mounted portion 32 and a second position protruding from the mounted portion 32. At the second position, the claw portion 37 engages with the engaging portion 13 provided on the lower surface of the case 10 to fix the case 10 to the mounted portion 32.
  • the case 10 can be fixed to the mounted portion 32 by a simple fixing method such as engaging the claw portion 37 of the mounted portion 32 with the engaging portion 13 of the case 10. Further, since the claw portion 37 can move between the first position and the second position, the case 10 can be easily fixed to the mounted portion 32. Therefore, workability when fixing the case 10 to the mounted portion 32 is improved.
  • the cover 11 is rotatably supported about the rotation axis J with respect to the case 10. By pressing the cover 11, the rod body 33 rotates the cover 11 about the rotation axis J.
  • the rod body 33 can open the cover 11 simply by pressing the cover 11. Therefore, workability when the cover 11 is opened is improved.
  • the feeder 20 further includes a transport unit 34 for transporting the parts supplied from the case 10, and a feeder main body portion 40 to which the mounted portion 32 and the transport portion 34 are detachably attached.
  • the transport unit 34 is an example of a parts transport unit.
  • the mounted portion 32 and the transport portion 34 can be provided for each part accommodated in the case 10. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the mixing of parts in the transport unit 34 as compared with the case where the transport unit 34 is shared regardless of the parts.
  • the feeder 20 has a cover 32a provided in the opening 32b formed at a position corresponding to the opening 15 of the case 10 in a state where the mounted portion 32 is mounted on the mounted portion 32.
  • the opening 32b is an example of the second opening, and the cover 32a is an example of the second cover.
  • the opening 32b can be closed by the cover 32a.
  • the opening 32b can be closed by the cover 32a.
  • the case 10 is a case attached to the feeder 20 described above, and the storage chamber 12a for accommodating the parts in a bulk state and the parts from the accommodation chamber 12a to the feeder 20. It is provided with a cover 11 provided in the opening 15 for supplying. The cover 11 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the physical action of the rod body 33 of the mounted portion 32 to which the case 10 is attached / detached.
  • first convex portion 14 provided on the wall surface of the case 10 is further provided.
  • the first convex portion 14 has a positioning portion 14a that determines a gripping position when gripping the first convex portion 14.
  • the first convex portion 14 is an example of the convex portion.
  • accommodation chamber 12a has an inclined surface 16 that inclines downward toward the opening 15.
  • the mounting system 1 includes the feeder 20, the board transport mechanism 102 that transports the substrate 103, and the mounting head 107 that takes out components from the feeder 20 and mounts them on the substrate 103. May be provided.
  • the board transfer mechanism 102 is an example of a board transfer section
  • the mounting head 107 is an example of a component mounting section
  • the board 103 is an example of an object.
  • the mounting system 1 is supplied by the feeder 20 in which the case for accommodating the bulk parts is detachable, the carriage 70 in which the feeder 20 is arranged, and the feeder 20. It is possible to read the information contained in the mounting head 107 that holds the components and mounts them on the object, the RF tag T1 provided on the feeder 20, and the RF tag T2 provided on the case 10, and is provided on the trolley 70.
  • the device 130 may be provided.
  • the dolly 70 is an example of a feeder arrangement portion
  • the RF tag T1 is an example of a first RF tag
  • the RF tag T2 is an example of a second RF tag.
  • the reading device 130 can acquire information (tag information) from each of the two RF tags. For example, by reading the barcode, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to acquire the tag information. Therefore, workability when acquiring tag information is improved.
  • the reading device 130 has an antenna a1 capable of transmitting and receiving a signal to the RF tag T1 and an antenna a2 capable of transmitting and receiving a signal to the RF tag T2.
  • the antenna a1 is an example of the first antenna
  • the antenna a2 is an example of the second antenna.
  • the mounting system 1 may further include a transmission unit capable of transmitting a signal from the antenna a2 to the RF tag T2 provided in the case 10.
  • the antenna a2 can transmit and receive a signal via the transmission unit even when the signal cannot be directly transmitted and received to the RF tag T2.
  • the transmission unit of the mounting system 1 includes an antenna a3 provided on the feeder 20 and arranged so as to face the RF tag T2, and an antenna a4 provided on the feeder 20 and arranged so as to face the antenna a2. , A cable C3 connecting the antenna a3 and the antenna a4.
  • the antenna a3 is an example of the third antenna
  • the antenna a4 is an example of the fourth antenna.
  • the antenna a2 can transmit and receive signals via the antenna a4, the cable C3, and the antenna a3 even when the signal cannot be directly transmitted and received to the RF tag T2. Further, since the antenna a3 and the antenna a4 are connected by the cable C3, the degree of freedom in the position where the antenna a3 and the antenna a4 are arranged is increased.
  • the dolly 70 is configured so that a plurality of feeders 20 can be arranged.
  • the reading device 130 has an antenna a1 in each of the plurality of feeders 20, and corresponds to the antenna a1 in each of the plurality of antennas a1 based on the strength of the signal received from the RF tag T1 of each of the plurality of feeders 20.
  • the RF tag T1 is determined.
  • the corresponding RF tag T1 can be easily and accurately determined.
  • the feeder 20 may have a feeder main body 40 and an attachment 30 having an attached portion 32 that is detachable to and detachable from the feeder main body 40 and to which the case 10 is detachably attached.
  • the feeder 20 can be separated into the feeder main body 40 and the attachment 30.
  • the attachment 30 for example, by setting the attachment 30 for each component, it is possible to prevent the components from being mixed in the attachment 30.
  • the RF tag T1 is provided in the feeder main body 40, and the reading device 130 has an antenna a4 capable of transmitting and receiving signals to the RF tag T3 provided in the attachment 30.
  • the RF tag T3 is an example of a third RF tag
  • the antenna a5 is an example of a fifth antenna.
  • the tag information of the RF tag T3 provided on the attachment 30 can be acquired more reliably via the antenna a5.
  • the antenna a3 transmits a signal including the information stored in the RF tag T2 to the RF tag T3.
  • tag information can be aggregated in the RF tag T3. That is, it is possible to save the trouble required for reading the tag information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability.
  • the feeder 20 has a long shape, and the RF tag T2 and the RF tag T3 may be arranged so that at least a part thereof does not overlap in the longitudinal direction of the feeder 20.
  • the trolley 70 has a waiting area A21 in which a feeder, a case or a tape feeder provided with the RF tag T4 stands by.
  • the reading device 130 has an antenna a6 capable of transmitting and receiving signals to and from the RF tag T4.
  • the RF tag T4 is an example of a fourth RF tag
  • the antenna a6 is an example of a sixth antenna.
  • tag information for example, identification information, remaining number information, etc.
  • FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the appearance of the case 210 according to the present modification.
  • FIG. 19 is a diagram schematically showing a state in which the case 210 according to this modification is attached to the feeder main body portion 240.
  • the case 210 according to this modification is different from the case 10 according to the embodiment in that it mainly has a transport portion 234.
  • the case 210 according to the present modification will be described focusing on the differences from the case 10 according to the embodiment.
  • the same or similar configuration as the case 10 according to the embodiment is designated by the same reference numeral as the case 10 according to the embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.
  • the case 210 has a transport unit 234 in addition to the case 10 according to the embodiment. That is, in the case 210, the case main body portion 12 and the transport portion 234 are integrally formed. This is an example in which the transport unit 234 is provided for each part housed in the case 210.
  • the transport unit 234 transports the parts supplied from the case main body 12 to the position where they are taken out by the mounting head 107. In this modification, the transport unit 234 transports the parts from the case main body portion 12 to the opening 235a.
  • the transport unit 234 transports parts by the vibration generated by the vibration generation unit 41.
  • the transport unit 234 is an example of a component transport unit.
  • the cover 235 covers the opening 235a and is in a closed state until mounting is performed.
  • the case 210 may have a cover 11 at the boundary between the case main body portion 12 and the transport portion 234. In FIG. 18, the cover 11 is not shown. The cover 11 may not be provided.
  • the second convex portion 218 is a long convex portion provided from the case main body portion 12 to the lower surface of the transport portion 234.
  • a second convex portion 218 is formed by forming a long notch 219 in the longitudinal direction of the case 210 from the case main body portion 12 to the lower surface of the transport portion 234.
  • the feeder main body 240 is an object to which the case 210 can be attached and detached.
  • the feeder main body 240 has a rod body 246 in addition to the feeder main body 40 according to the embodiment. Further, the feeder main body 240 has a drive unit 245 instead of the drive unit 45.
  • the drive unit 245 moves the rod body 246 provided so as to press one end of the cover 11 along the X-axis direction under the control of the control unit 51.
  • the drive unit 245 brings the cover 11 from the closed state to the open state by physically acting the rod body 246 on the cover 11 in a state where the case 210 is attached to the feeder main body unit 240.
  • the drive unit 245 is realized by, for example, an actuator.
  • the rod body 246 is an example of an acting portion that acts on the cover 11 provided in the opening 15 of the case 10.
  • the drive unit 245 may have the function of the drive unit 45 according to the embodiment.
  • the transport unit 234 is integrated with the case 210, so that the step of attaching the case and the attachment can be omitted, so that the deterioration of workability can be further suppressed.
  • FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing how the case 10 according to this modification is attached to the attachment 330.
  • the attachment 330 according to the present modification is different from the attachment 30 according to the embodiment in that it mainly has a cover 333 that changes from the closed state to the open state in conjunction with the case 10 being attached to the attachment 330.
  • the attachment 330 according to the present modification will be described focusing on the differences from the attachment 30 according to the embodiment.
  • the same or similar configuration as the attachment 30 according to the embodiment is designated by the same reference numeral as the attachment 30 according to the embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.
  • FIG. 20A shows a state in which the case 10 is being attached to the attachment 330.
  • the attachment 330 is provided in the opening 32b (see FIG. 20 (b)) and has a cover 333 that opens and closes by moving in the X-axis direction.
  • the cover 333 moves along the direction in which the case 10 extends (X-axis direction) by being physically acted on by the case 10.
  • the cover 333 has an inclined surface 333a corresponding to the inclined surface 330a formed inside the mounted portion 332. At least a part of the inclined surfaces 330a and 333a are in contact with each other.
  • FIG. 20B shows a state in which the case 10 is attached to the attachment 330.
  • the cover 333 moves along the inclination of the inclined surface 330a by moving the case 10 to the plus side of the X-axis.
  • the cover 333 moves to the upper right. Therefore, the opening 32b appears below the cover 333.
  • the parts from the case 10 are supplied to the transport portion 34 of the attachment 330 through the opening 32b.
  • the attachment 330 includes a mounted portion 332 to which the case 10 for accommodating the bulk parts is detachably attached.
  • the case 10 has a side surface 10a (an example of the acting portion) that acts on the cover 333 provided in the opening 32b of the mounted portion 332.
  • the side surface 10a physically acts on the cover 333 according to the operation of the case 10 being attached to the attachment 330, thereby changing the cover 333 from the closed state to the open state.
  • the cover 333 changes from the closed state to the open state in conjunction with the operation in which the case 10 is attached to the attachment 330.
  • the side surface 10a may be configured to include, for example, the cover 11.
  • a spring for urging the cover 333 of the attachment downward may be provided on the attachment, and the cover 333 may move along the inclined surface 333a by the urging force of the spring.
  • the cover 333 of the attachment 330 can be opened from the closed state by simply attaching the case 10 to the attachment 330 without performing an operation for opening and closing the cover 333, so that workability is reduced. It is further suppressed.
  • the attachment 330 may have a relay chamber 334 formed between the transport unit 34 to which the parts are transported and the case 10.
  • the relay chamber 334 is provided on a supply path in which parts are supplied from the opening 15 of the case 10 to the transport unit 34.
  • the sensor 140 may be provided, for example, so as to be able to detect a component in the relay chamber 334.
  • the case 10 (an example of the first accommodating portion) is based on the output of the sensor 140 provided in the relay chamber 334.
  • the cover 11 provided in the opening 15 may be opened and closed (corresponding to steps S104 and S108 shown in FIG. 13).
  • the attachment 30 of the mounting system 1 according to this modification has a relay chamber 334 between the transport unit 34 to which the parts are transported and the case 10.
  • the integrated control device 50 confirms the remaining number of parts in the relay chamber 334 in the parts supply step.
  • the attachment 30 is an example of a second accommodating unit
  • the transport unit 34 is an example of a parts transport unit
  • the integrated control device 50 is an example of a confirmation unit.
  • FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the opening and closing of the cover 433 of the attachment 430 according to the present modification.
  • FIG. 21 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the case 10 and the attachment 430 according to the modified example cut in the XZ plane.
  • the attachment 430 according to the present modification is the attachment 30 according to the embodiment in that the cover 433 of the attachment 430 is configured to open and close in conjunction with the opening and closing of the cover 11 of the case 10. It's different.
  • the attachment 430 according to the present modification will be described focusing on the differences from the attachment 30 according to the embodiment. Further, the same or similar configuration as the attachment 30 according to the embodiment is designated by the same reference numeral as the attachment 30 according to the embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.
  • the cover 433 is provided so as to cover the opening 433a.
  • the cover 433 comes into contact with the cover 11 due to the urging force of the elastic body 434.
  • the elastic body 434 is, for example, a coil spring, but is not limited thereto.
  • a part of the lower surface (the surface on the minus side of the Z axis) of the cover 433 covers the opening 433a (exposed to the transport portion 34).
  • the cover 433 is an example of the second cover.
  • FIG. 21B shows a state in which the collation is successful, the rod body 33 is pushed out by the drive unit 45, and the cover 11 is rotated clockwise by the rod body 33.
  • the cover 11 and the cover 433 are in contact with each other, the cover 11 moves (slides) to the X-axis plus side against the urging force of the elastic body 434 by the rotation of the cover 11.
  • the cover 433 also changes from the closed state to the open state in conjunction with the change of the cover 11 from the closed state to the open state.
  • the elastic body 434 may have a spring constant such that the cover 433 can be moved by the rotation of the cover 11. Further, from the viewpoint of suppressing component clogging in the opening 433a, the cover 433 is X-axis by the cover 11 when the length L or less of the lower surface portion exposed to the transport portion 34 when the cover 433 is closed in the X-axis direction. It should be configured so that it can be moved to the plus side.
  • the cover 11 when the cover 11 is closed, the rod body 33 is pushed back by the drive unit 45, and the cover 11 rotates counterclockwise.
  • the cover 433 receives the urging force of the elastic body 434 and the X-axis minus moves to the side (slide).
  • the cover 433 also changes from the open state to the closed state in conjunction with the change of the cover 11 from the open state to the closed state.
  • the cover 11 is configured to be in the closed state from the open state and to drop the parts adhering to the side surface of the cover 433 to the transport portion 34.
  • the cover 433 according to the present modification opens and closes in conjunction with the opening and closing of the cover 11 by the cover 11 (an example of the working portion). It can be said that the cover 433 opens and closes by the physical action of the cover 11.
  • the cover 433 closes and opens in conjunction with the opening and closing of the cover 11 by the rod body 33.
  • the cover 433 is an example of the second cover
  • the rod 33 is an example of the working portion
  • the cover 11 is an example of the first cover.
  • the cover 433 can be opened and closed without performing an operation (or control) for opening and closing the cover 433, which reduces workability. Can be further suppressed.
  • the present invention is not limited to this, and the acting portion may be provided on the case 10.
  • the acting portion provided in the case 10 physically acts on the cover 433 of the mounted portion 432 to open the cover 433.
  • the cover 11 of the case 10 is in contact with the cover 433 and may be opened in conjunction with the opening of the cover 433. In this case, the cover 11 may rotate inside the case 10. Further, the cover 11 may be closed in conjunction with the closing of the cover 433.
  • the cover 433 is an example of the first cover
  • the cover 11 is an example of the second cover.
  • the control device uses a transfer robot to replace the case, and prepares and replaces the supply unit in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this.
  • the control device may offer the worker to replace the case, as well as prepare and replace the supply unit via the presentation device.
  • the presenting device is, for example, a display device such as a liquid crystal display, but may be a sound output device or the like.
  • control device in the above embodiment and the like and the components to be controlled is not particularly limited, and is performed by wired communication. It may be performed by wireless communication. Wireless communication may be performed using Wi-Fi®, Bluetooth®, ZigBee, optical communication, or specified low power radio.
  • the feeder arrangement portion may be a fixed holding base (for example, a holding base attached to a mounting line) or the like. That is, the feeder arrangement portion is not limited to the movable one.
  • the transport unit has described an example of transporting parts by the vibration of the vibration generating portion, but the method of transporting the parts is not limited to this.
  • the transport unit may transport parts by, for example, air supply, magnetic force, conveyor, or the like.
  • the reading device provided on the trolley in the above-described embodiment or the like can simultaneously acquire the tag information transmitted from the plurality of RF tags, and the information to be written in the RF tag can be written in the plurality of RF tags. It may be realized by a reader / writer that can transmit at the same time.
  • the acting portion acting on the cover presses the cover, but the acting portion is not limited to pressing. ..
  • the action may be that the acting portion pulls the cover (pulling in the plus direction of the X-axis in the example of FIG. 6) in a state where the acting portion and the cover are engaged with each other.
  • the cover is rotated clockwise about the axis of rotation J to expose the opening 15.
  • the action of the acting part on the cover also includes the indirect action of the acting part on the cover.
  • the general or specific aspects of the present disclosure may be realized by a recording medium such as a system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, or a computer-readable CD-ROM. Further, it may be realized by any combination of a system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program and a recording medium.
  • the division of functional blocks in the block diagram is an example, and multiple functional blocks can be realized as one functional block, one functional block can be divided into multiple, and some functions can be transferred to other functional blocks. You may. Further, the functions of a plurality of functional blocks having similar functions may be processed by a single hardware or software in parallel or in a time division manner.
  • each component for example, a processing unit such as a control unit
  • each component is realized by being configured with dedicated hardware or by executing a software program suitable for each component. May be good.
  • Each component may be realized by a program execution unit such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or a processor reading and executing a software program recorded on a recording medium such as a hard disk or a semiconductor memory.
  • each component may be a circuit (or an integrated circuit). These circuits may form one circuit as a whole, or may be separate circuits from each other. Further, each of these circuits may be a general-purpose circuit or a dedicated circuit.
  • This disclosure can be used for systems and methods for producing a mounting board by mounting a component on a board.

Abstract

This mounting method is for a mounting system (1) comprising: a feeder (20) for which a case (10) that houses parts in bulk form is detachable, and that has an attachment (30) that houses the parts supplied from the case (10); and a mounting head (107) that holds the parts supplied by the feeder (20) and that mounts the parts on a substrate (103). The mounting method includes a mounting step for holding the parts inside the feeder (20) and mounting the parts on the substrate (103) using the mounting head (107), and parts-supplying steps (S104 to S108) for exchanging the case (10) in a state with parts remaining in the attachment (30).

Description

実装方法、及び、実装システムMounting method and mounting system
 本開示は、実装方法、及び、実装システムに関する。 This disclosure relates to a mounting method and a mounting system.
 特許文献1には、バルクフィーダに挿入されたバルクカセットを交換する際に、バルクカセットから供給された電子部品チップを所定位置まで移動させるためのチップ送給路を通る電子部品チップが検出されなくなった状態で、バルクカセットを抜出し、新しいバルクカセットをバルクカフィーダに挿入することが開示されている。 In Patent Document 1, when the bulk cassette inserted in the bulk feeder is replaced, the electronic component chip passing through the chip feeding path for moving the electronic component chip supplied from the bulk cassette to a predetermined position is no longer detected. In this state, it is disclosed that the bulk cassette is taken out and a new bulk cassette is inserted into the bulk cuffer.
特開平10-335888号公報Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 10-335888
 本開示は、生産性の低下を抑制することができる実装方法、及び、実装システムを提供する。 The present disclosure provides a mounting method and a mounting system that can suppress a decrease in productivity.
 本開示の一態様に係る実装方法は、バルク状態の部品を収容する第1の収容部が着脱可能であり、前記第1の収容部から供給された前記部品を収容する第2の収容部を有するフィーダと、前記フィーダにより供給される前記部品を保持して対象物に実装する部品実装部とを備える実装システムにおける実装方法であって、前記部品実装部により前記フィーダ内の前記部品を保持して前記対象物に実装する実装工程と、前記第2の収容部に前記部品が残っている状態で、前記第1の収容部を交換する部品補給工程とを含む。 In the mounting method according to one aspect of the present disclosure, a first accommodating portion for accommodating parts in a bulk state is removable, and a second accommodating portion for accommodating the parts supplied from the first accommodating portion is provided. It is a mounting method in a mounting system including a feeder having a feeder and a component mounting unit that holds the component supplied by the feeder and mounts the component on an object, wherein the component mounting unit holds the component in the feeder. It includes a mounting step of mounting on the object and a component replenishment step of replacing the first accommodating portion with the component remaining in the second accommodating portion.
 本開示の一態様に係る実装システムは、バルク状態の部品を収容する第1の収容部が着脱可能であり、前記第1の収容部から供給された前記部品を収容する第2の収容部を有するフィーダと、前記フィーダにより供給される前記部品を保持して対象物に実装する部品実装部と、前記第2の収容部に前記部品が残っている状態で、前記第1の収容部を交換する制御を行う制御部とを備える。 In the mounting system according to one aspect of the present disclosure, a first accommodating portion for accommodating parts in a bulk state is removable, and a second accommodating portion for accommodating the parts supplied from the first accommodating portion is provided. The feeder to be held, the component mounting unit that holds the component supplied by the feeder and mounts it on the object, and the first accommodating portion with the component remaining in the second accommodating portion are exchanged. It is provided with a control unit that controls the operation.
 本開示の一態様に係る実装方法等によれば、生産性の低下を抑制することができる。 According to the mounting method or the like according to one aspect of the present disclosure, it is possible to suppress a decrease in productivity.
図1Aは、実施の形態に係る実装システムの概略構成を示す図である。FIG. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mounting system according to an embodiment. 図1Bは、実施の形態に係る実装システムの機能構成を示すブロック図である。FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the mounting system according to the embodiment. 図1Cは、実施の形態に係る搬送ロボットの構成を示す図である。FIG. 1C is a diagram showing a configuration of a transfer robot according to an embodiment. 図2は、実施の形態に係る部品実装装置の構成を示す図である。FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration of a component mounting device according to an embodiment. 図3は、実施の形態に係る供給ユニットを模式的に示す図である。FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a supply unit according to an embodiment. 図4は、実施の形態に係るケース、アタッチメント及びフィーダ本体部それぞれを取り外した状態を示す図である。FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which each of the case, the attachment, and the feeder main body according to the embodiment is removed. 図5は、実施の形態に係るケースの外観を示す斜視図である。FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the case according to the embodiment. 図6は、実施の形態に係るケースのカバーの開閉を説明するための第1図である。FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the opening and closing of the cover of the case according to the embodiment. 図7は、実施の形態に係るケースのカバーの開閉を説明するための第2図である。FIG. 7 is a second diagram for explaining the opening and closing of the cover of the case according to the embodiment. 図8は、実施の形態に係るケースを搬送ロボットが把持する様子を模式的に示す図である。FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing how the transfer robot grips the case according to the embodiment. 図9は、実施の形態に係るケースが取り付けられたフィーダを、ケースの長手方向から見たときの模式図である。FIG. 9 is a schematic view of the feeder to which the case according to the embodiment is attached when viewed from the longitudinal direction of the case. 図10は、実施の形態に係る搬送部による部品の搬送を説明するための図である。FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the transfer of parts by the transfer unit according to the embodiment. 図11Aは、実施の形態に係るアタッチメントのカバーが開口している状態を示す図である。FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a state in which the cover of the attachment according to the embodiment is open. 図11Bは、実施の形態に係るアタッチメントのカバーが閉じた状態を示す図である。FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a state in which the cover of the attachment according to the embodiment is closed. 図11Cは、実施の形態に係るアタッチメントのカバーが閉じてロックされた状態を示す図である。FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a state in which the cover of the attachment according to the embodiment is closed and locked. 図12は、実施の形態に係るアンテナ及びRFタグの配置を説明するための模式部分断面図である。FIG. 12 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view for explaining the arrangement of the antenna and the RF tag according to the embodiment. 図13は、実施の形態に係る実装システムのケースを交換する動作を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an operation of exchanging cases of the mounting system according to the embodiment. 図14は、実施の形態に係るアタッチメントにケースを取り付ける様子を示す図である。FIG. 14 is a diagram showing how the case is attached to the attachment according to the embodiment. 図15は、実施の形態に係る実装システムのケース及びフィーダを交換する動作を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an operation of exchanging a case and a feeder of the mounting system according to the embodiment. 図16は、図15に示すタグ情報を取得する動作を示すフローチャートである。FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an operation of acquiring the tag information shown in FIG. 図17は、アンテナに対応するRFタグを特定する処理を説明するための模式図である。FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram for explaining a process of identifying an RF tag corresponding to an antenna. 図18は、実施の形態の変形例1に係るケースの外観を示す図である。FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the appearance of the case according to the first modification of the embodiment. 図19は、実施の形態の変形例1に係るケースをフィーダ本体部に取り付けた様子を模式的に示す図である。FIG. 19 is a diagram schematically showing a state in which the case according to the first modification of the embodiment is attached to the feeder main body. 図20は、実施の形態の変形例2に係るケースをアタッチメントに取り付ける様子を模式的に示す図である。FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing how the case according to the second modification of the embodiment is attached to the attachment. 図21は、実施の形態の変形例3に係るアタッチメントのカバーの開閉を説明するための図である。FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the opening and closing of the cover of the attachment according to the third modification of the embodiment.
 (本開示に至った経緯)
 本開示の実施の形態等の説明に先立ち、本開示に至った経緯について説明する。
(Background to this disclosure)
Prior to the explanation of the embodiments and the like of the present disclosure, the circumstances leading to the present disclosure will be described.
 特許文献1には、バーコードが貼り付けられたケース(バルクカセット)が挿入されるフィーダ(バルクフィーダ)が開示されている。ケースは、バルク状態の電子部品チップ(部品)を収容する。中央制御装置は、フィーダに挿入されたケースのバーコードをバーコードリーダで読み込んで、バーコードが示す電子部品チップの情報が、指定の電子部品チップの情報と一致する場合、シャッタが閉じられた状態にロックするシャッタソレノイドをオンしてシャッタを開閉するシャッタ開閉板のロックを解除させる。これに伴い、シャッタ開閉板と接続されたシャッタ開閉レバーがばねにより引っ張られる(駆動する)ので、シャッタ開閉板がスライドし、シャッタが開く。これにより、ケース内の電子部品チップがチップ送給部に供給される。 Patent Document 1 discloses a feeder (bulk feeder) into which a case (bulk cassette) to which a barcode is attached is inserted. The case houses electronic component chips (components) in bulk. The central controller reads the barcode of the case inserted in the feeder with the barcode reader, and if the information of the electronic component chip indicated by the barcode matches the information of the specified electronic component chip, the shutter is closed. The shutter solenoid that locks to the state is turned on to open and close the shutter, and the shutter opening / closing plate is unlocked. Along with this, the shutter opening / closing lever connected to the shutter opening / closing plate is pulled (driven) by the spring, so that the shutter opening / closing plate slides and the shutter opens. As a result, the electronic component chip in the case is supplied to the chip feeding unit.
 また、特許文献1には、バルクフィーダに挿入されたバルクカセットを交換する際に、バルクカセットから供給された電子部品チップを所定位置まで移動させるためのチップ送給路(搬送部)を通る電子部品チップが検出されなくなった状態で、バルクカセットを抜出し、新しいバルクカセットをバルクカフィーダに挿入することが開示されている。 Further, in Patent Document 1, when the bulk cassette inserted in the bulk feeder is replaced, the electronic component chip supplied from the bulk cassette passes through a chip feeding path (conveying unit) for moving the electronic component chip to a predetermined position. It is disclosed that the bulk cassette is taken out and a new bulk cassette is inserted into the bulk cuffer when the component chip is no longer detected.
 上記のように、特許文献1では、チップ送給路を通る電子部品チップが検出されなくなった状態でバルクカセットの交換が行われる。この状態でバルクカセットの交換を行う場合、チップ送給路には電子部品チップがないので、当該電子部品チップの供給が停止する。つまり、バルクカセットを交換している間、実装工程における生産性が低下する恐れがある。そこで、本願発明者らは、ケースを交換する際の生産性の低下を抑制することができる実装方法等について鋭意検討を行い、以下で説明する実装方法等を創案した。 As described above, in Patent Document 1, the bulk cassette is replaced in a state where the electronic component chip passing through the chip feeding path is not detected. When the bulk cassette is replaced in this state, the supply of the electronic component chip is stopped because there is no electronic component chip in the chip feeding path. That is, the productivity in the mounting process may decrease while the bulk cassette is being replaced. Therefore, the inventors of the present application have diligently studied a mounting method and the like that can suppress a decrease in productivity when exchanging cases, and devised a mounting method and the like described below.
 以下、実施の形態等について、図面を参照しながら説明する。以下で説明する実施の形態等は、いずれも包括的または具体的な例を示すものである。以下の実施の形態等で示される数値、形状、材料、構成要素、構成要素の配置位置及び接続形態、ステップ(工程)、ステップ(工程)の順序などは、一例であり、本開示を限定する主旨ではない。また、以下の実施の形態等における構成要素のうち、独立請求項に記載されていない構成要素については、任意の構成要素として説明される。 Hereinafter, embodiments and the like will be described with reference to the drawings. The embodiments and the like described below are all comprehensive or specific examples. Numerical values, shapes, materials, components, arrangement positions and connection forms of components, steps (processes), order of steps (processes), etc. shown in the following embodiments are examples, and the present disclosure is limited. Not the point. Further, among the components in the following embodiments and the like, the components not described in the independent claims are described as arbitrary components.
 また、各図は模式図であり、必ずしも厳密に図示されたものではない。また、各図において、実質的に同一の構成に対しては同一の符号を付し、重複する説明は省略または簡略化される場合がある。また、各図において、同一の物体を図示している場合であても、便宜上、縮尺を変更している場合がある。 Also, each figure is a schematic diagram and is not necessarily exactly illustrated. Further, in each figure, the same reference numerals may be given to substantially the same configurations, and duplicate explanations may be omitted or simplified. Further, even when the same object is shown in each figure, the scale may be changed for convenience.
 また、本明細書および図面において、X軸、Y軸及びZ軸は、三次元直交座標系の三軸を示している。各実施の形態では、Z軸は、フィーダとケースとが重ねられる方向と平行な軸である。X軸及びY軸は、互いにZ軸と略直交する軸である。フィーダは長尺状であり、X軸は、当該フィーダの長手方向と平行な軸である。また、本明細書において、「平面視」とは、Z軸方向から見る場合を意味する。 Further, in the present specification and the drawings, the X-axis, the Y-axis, and the Z-axis indicate the three axes of the three-dimensional Cartesian coordinate system. In each embodiment, the Z axis is an axis parallel to the direction in which the feeder and the case are overlapped. The X-axis and the Y-axis are axes that are substantially orthogonal to the Z-axis. The feeder is elongated and the X-axis is an axis parallel to the longitudinal direction of the feeder. Further, in the present specification, "planar view" means a case of viewing from the Z-axis direction.
 また、本明細書において、一致、等しい、平行などの要素間の関係性を示す用語、および、板状、矩形状などの要素の形状を示す用語、並びに、数値、および、数値範囲は、厳格な意味のみを表す表現ではなく、実質的に同等な範囲、例えば数%程度の差異をも含むことを意味する表現である。 Further, in the present specification, terms indicating relationships between elements such as match, equality, and parallel, terms indicating the shape of elements such as plate and rectangle, numerical values, and numerical ranges are strict. It is not an expression that expresses only a meaning, but an expression that means that a substantially equivalent range, for example, a difference of about several percent is included.
 (実施の形態)
 [1-1.実装システムの概要]
 本実施の形態に係る実装システム1の構成について、図1A~図12を参照しながら説明する。図1Aは、本実施の形態に係る実装システム1の概略構成を示す図である。まずは、実装システム1の概要について、図1Aを参照しながら説明する。
(Embodiment)
[1-1. Implementation system overview]
The configuration of the mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1A to 12. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing a schematic configuration of a mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment. First, the outline of the mounting system 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 1A.
 図1Aに示すように、本実施の形態の実装システム1は、統合制御装置50と、第1制御装置50aと、第2制御装置50bと、搬送ロボット60と、供給ユニット80と、部品保管庫Wと、複数の部品実装装置100からなる実装ライン90とを備える。また、実装システム1は、保管エリアA1、準備エリアA2及び実装エリアA3の3つのエリアを含んで構成される。なお、詳細は後述するが、ケース10は、バルク状態の部品を収容する部品収容部及び第1の収容部の一例であり、アタッチメント30は、ケース10から供給された部品を搬送する機能を有し、第2の収容部の一例である。なお、部品は、例えば、抵抗器、コンデンサなどの電子部品であるが、これに限定されず、基板に実装可能なものであればよい。 As shown in FIG. 1A, the mounting system 1 of the present embodiment includes an integrated control device 50, a first control device 50a, a second control device 50b, a transfer robot 60, a supply unit 80, and a parts storage. It includes a W and a mounting line 90 including a plurality of component mounting devices 100. Further, the mounting system 1 includes three areas, a storage area A1, a preparation area A2, and a mounting area A3. Although details will be described later, the case 10 is an example of a parts accommodating portion and a first accommodating portion for accommodating parts in a bulk state, and the attachment 30 has a function of conveying the parts supplied from the case 10. However, it is an example of the second accommodating part. The component is, for example, an electronic component such as a resistor or a capacitor, but the component is not limited to this, and may be any component that can be mounted on a substrate.
 保管エリアA1は、ケース10及びアタッチメント30を保管するエリアである。保管エリアA1は、例えば、部品保管庫Wを含む。部品保管庫Wには、ケース10単体、アタッチメント30単体、及び、ケース10が取り付けられたアタッチメント30の少なくとも1つが保管される。また、部品保管庫Wには、ケース10及びアタッチメント30のそれぞれに取り付けられるRF(Radio Frequency)タグから当該RFタグに記憶されているタグ情報を読み出したり、当該RFタグに書込むべきタグ情報を書込んだりするリーダライタRWが取り付けられる。リーダライタRWは、固定されており、複数のRFタグから送信されてきたタグ情報を同時に取得することができる。また、当該RFタグに書込むべきタグ情報を複数のRFタグに同時に送信することができる。 The storage area A1 is an area for storing the case 10 and the attachment 30. The storage area A1 includes, for example, a parts storage W. At least one of the case 10, the attachment 30, and the attachment 30 to which the case 10 is attached is stored in the parts storage W. Further, in the parts storage W, the tag information stored in the RF tag can be read from the RF (Radio Frequency) tag attached to each of the case 10 and the attachment 30, and the tag information to be written in the RF tag can be read. A reader / writer RW for writing is attached. The reader / writer RW is fixed and can simultaneously acquire tag information transmitted from a plurality of RF tags. Further, the tag information to be written in the RF tag can be transmitted to a plurality of RF tags at the same time.
 タグ情報は、RFタグがケース10に貼り付けられている場合、ケース10に収容されている部品に関する情報を含む。例えば、タグ情報は、部品の種類を示す情報(識別情報)、数量(残数)を示す情報、使用期限を示す情報などの少なくとも1つを含む。なお、数量を示す情報は、現時点での数量である。 The tag information includes information about the parts housed in the case 10 when the RF tag is attached to the case 10. For example, the tag information includes at least one of information indicating the type of a part (identification information), information indicating a quantity (remaining number), information indicating an expiration date, and the like. The information indicating the quantity is the quantity at the present time.
 また、タグ情報は、RFタグがアタッチメント30に貼り付けられている場合、アタッチメント30の識別情報、使用履歴などの少なくとも1つを含む。 Further, the tag information includes at least one such as the identification information of the attachment 30 and the usage history when the RF tag is attached to the attachment 30.
 リーダライタRWにより読み取られたタグ情報は、統合制御装置50により管理される。 The tag information read by the reader / writer RW is managed by the integrated control device 50.
 なお、図1Aでは、保管エリアA1は、実装エリアA3と分離されている例について図示しているが、これに限定されない。例えば、実装エリアA3の一部として保管エリアA1が設けられてもよい。例えば、実装エリアA3内に部品保管庫Wが含まれていてもよい。また、例えば、実装ライン90の中に部品保管庫Wが含まれていてもよい。実装ライン90内に部品保管庫Wが含まれている場合、部品保管庫Wから実装ライン90内の装置にケース10及びアタッチメント30を直接供給することができる。つまり、準備エリアA2を介さずにケース10及びアタッチメント30を供給することができる。 Note that FIG. 1A illustrates an example in which the storage area A1 is separated from the mounting area A3, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the storage area A1 may be provided as a part of the mounting area A3. For example, the component storage W may be included in the mounting area A3. Further, for example, the mounting line 90 may include a component storage W. When the component storage W is included in the mounting line 90, the case 10 and the attachment 30 can be directly supplied from the component storage W to the device in the mounting line 90. That is, the case 10 and the attachment 30 can be supplied without going through the preparation area A2.
 準備エリアA2は、実装エリアA3の実装ライン90で用いられるものを事前に準備するためのエリアである。例えば、実装ライン90に取り付けられる供給ユニット80が事前に準備される。供給ユニット80は、例えば、保持部71を有する台車70と、保持部71に保持されるフィーダ本体部40と、フィーダ本体部40に取付けられるアタッチメント30と、アタッチメント30に取付けられるケース10とを備える。本実施の形態では、台車70は、複数の保持部71を備える。なお、図1Aでは複数の保持部71のうちの1つの保持部71が示されている。この場合、準備エリアA2には、例えば、フィーダ本体部40およびアタッチメント30が取付けられた台車70が配置される。第2制御装置50bは、実装ライン90において次の生産に使用される部品を収容するケース10を台車70に取付けられるアタッチメント30に取り付けるよう搬送ロボット60に指示することで、次の生産に使用される供給ユニット80を事前に準備する。準備エリアA2には、台車70に限らず、ケース10等を保持可能であれば、台車70に連結可能な保持装置が準備されていてもよい。 The preparation area A2 is an area for preparing in advance what is used in the mounting line 90 of the mounting area A3. For example, the supply unit 80 to be mounted on the mounting line 90 is prepared in advance. The supply unit 80 includes, for example, a dolly 70 having a holding portion 71, a feeder main body portion 40 held by the holding portion 71, an attachment 30 attached to the feeder main body portion 40, and a case 10 attached to the attachment 30. .. In the present embodiment, the dolly 70 includes a plurality of holding portions 71. Note that FIG. 1A shows one of the plurality of holding portions 71. In this case, for example, a carriage 70 to which the feeder main body 40 and the attachment 30 are attached is arranged in the preparation area A2. The second control device 50b is used in the next production by instructing the transfer robot 60 to attach the case 10 for accommodating the parts used in the next production in the mounting line 90 to the attachment 30 attached to the carriage 70. Supply unit 80 is prepared in advance. In the preparation area A2, not only the trolley 70 but also a holding device that can be connected to the trolley 70 may be prepared as long as the case 10 and the like can be held.
 また、台車70は、読取装置130を備える。読取装置130は、例えば、台車70の保持部71に固定されている。また、準備エリアA2において、供給ユニット80は、外部電源に接続されていてもよい。または供給ユニット80は、内部(例えば台車70内)に電源部を備えていてもよい。これにより、第2制御装置50bは、台車70に設けられた読取装置130を用いて、台車70に取り付けられたケース10、アタッチメント30及びフィーダ本体部40が正しい組み合わせであるかを確認することができる。また、第2制御装置50bは、1台の台車70に複数のケース10、アタッチメント30及びフィーダ本体部40のセットが配置される場合、それらの取り付け位置が正しいかを確認することができる。 Further, the dolly 70 is provided with a reading device 130. The reading device 130 is fixed to, for example, the holding portion 71 of the carriage 70. Further, in the preparation area A2, the supply unit 80 may be connected to an external power source. Alternatively, the supply unit 80 may include a power supply unit inside (for example, inside the carriage 70). As a result, the second control device 50b can confirm whether the case 10, the attachment 30, and the feeder main body 40 attached to the trolley 70 are in the correct combination by using the reading device 130 provided on the trolley 70. can. Further, when a set of a plurality of cases 10, attachments 30 and feeder main body 40 is arranged on one carriage 70, the second control device 50b can confirm whether the mounting positions thereof are correct.
 なお、準備エリアA2には、補給する可能性がある部品を収容するケース10が部品保管庫Wから搬送されて保管されてもよい。これにより、ケース10を補給する場合に、保管エリアA1からケース10を搬送するより時間を短縮することができる。 In the preparation area A2, a case 10 for accommodating parts that may be replenished may be transported from the parts storage W and stored. As a result, when the case 10 is replenished, the time can be shortened as compared with the case of transporting the case 10 from the storage area A1.
 実装エリアA3は、実装ライン90が配置されるエリアである。実装エリアA3と準備エリアA2とは、同一空間に配置されてもよい。実装ライン90は、上流側から搬入された基板に対してケース10に収容される部品を実装することで実装基板を生産し、生産した実装基板を下流側に搬出する。実装ライン90は、基板の供給、はんだ印刷作業、部品装着作業及びリフロー作業などを行う各種装置によって実現される。部品装着作業は、部品実装装置100により行われる。 The mounting area A3 is an area where the mounting line 90 is arranged. The mounting area A3 and the preparation area A2 may be arranged in the same space. The mounting line 90 produces a mounting board by mounting the components housed in the case 10 on the board carried in from the upstream side, and carries out the produced mounting board to the downstream side. The mounting line 90 is realized by various devices that supply a substrate, perform solder printing work, component mounting work, reflow work, and the like. The component mounting work is performed by the component mounting device 100.
 統合制御装置50は、第1制御装置50aと第2制御装置50bとに接続されており、実装システム1の各構成要素の情報を集約して管理する。第1制御装置50aは、実装ライン90の各構成要素を制御する。第1制御装置50aは、例えば、生産計画に基づいて、実装ライン90の生産を制御する。なお、実装ライン90の各構成要素は、第1制御装置50aと、実装ライン90の各構成要素(例えば、部品実装装置100)に設けられた制御装置(図示しない)とにより、制御されてもよい。第1制御装置50aは、実装ライン90に取り付けられた供給ユニット80のケース10内の部品の残数が所定数以下となると、統合制御装置50に対し、部品の補給要求を送信する。第2制御装置50bは、統合制御装置50からの部品の補給要求を受信し、搬送ロボット60に補給指示を出力し、当該部品を補給させる。具体的には、第2制御装置50bは、搬送ロボット60に対して、補給対象となるケース10の保管エリアA1内での位置、搬送ロボット60の移動経路、ケース10を補給する位置(例えば、実装ライン90内の位置、部品実装装置100内の位置、供給ユニット80内の位置、準備エリアA2内の位置)を指示する。搬送ロボット60は、第2制御装置50bからの指示に基づいて、保管エリアA1から補給対象となる部品を収容するケース10を実装ライン90まで搬送し、供給ユニット80のケース10を新しいケース10に交換する。具体的には、搬送ロボット60は供給ユニット80のケース10を回収し、新しいケース10を取り付ける。 The integrated control device 50 is connected to the first control device 50a and the second control device 50b, and aggregates and manages information on each component of the mounting system 1. The first control device 50a controls each component of the mounting line 90. The first control device 50a controls the production of the mounting line 90, for example, based on the production plan. Even if each component of the mounting line 90 is controlled by the first control device 50a and a control device (not shown) provided in each component of the mounting line 90 (for example, the component mounting device 100). good. When the remaining number of parts in the case 10 of the supply unit 80 mounted on the mounting line 90 becomes a predetermined number or less, the first control device 50a transmits a supply request for parts to the integrated control device 50. The second control device 50b receives the supply request for the parts from the integrated control device 50, outputs the supply instruction to the transfer robot 60, and supplies the parts. Specifically, the second control device 50b replenishes the transfer robot 60 with a position in the storage area A1 of the case 10 to be replenished, a movement path of the transfer robot 60, and a position for replenishing the case 10 (for example,). The position in the mounting line 90, the position in the component mounting device 100, the position in the supply unit 80, and the position in the preparation area A2) are instructed. Based on the instruction from the second control device 50b, the transfer robot 60 conveys the case 10 accommodating the parts to be replenished from the storage area A1 to the mounting line 90, and transfers the case 10 of the supply unit 80 to the new case 10. Exchange. Specifically, the transfer robot 60 collects the case 10 of the supply unit 80 and attaches a new case 10.
 また、第2制御装置50bは、供給ユニット80に取付けられるケース10を他の種類の部品を充填したケース10に変更する場合、搬送ロボット60を制御して、実装ライン90に取り付けられている供給ユニット80のケース10及びアタッチメント30を交換させる。 Further, when the case 10 attached to the supply unit 80 is changed to the case 10 filled with other types of parts, the second control device 50b controls the transfer robot 60 to supply the case 10 attached to the mounting line 90. The case 10 and the attachment 30 of the unit 80 are replaced.
 搬送ロボット60は、第2制御装置50bの制御により、ケース10及びアタッチメント30を搬送する自走式のロボットである。ここで、図1Cをさらに参照しながら、搬送ロボット60について説明する。図1Cは、本実施の形態に係る搬送ロボット60の構成を示す図である。 The transfer robot 60 is a self-propelled robot that conveys the case 10 and the attachment 30 under the control of the second control device 50b. Here, the transfer robot 60 will be described with reference to FIG. 1C. FIG. 1C is a diagram showing a configuration of a transfer robot 60 according to the present embodiment.
 図1Cに示すように、搬送ロボット60は、例えば、走行部62と格納部63とロボットアーム61とから構成される。走行部62は、車輪、車輪を駆動するモータを備えている。格納部63には、ケース10及びアタッチメント30が格納される。格納部63には、例えば、複数のケース10及びアタッチメント30のそれぞれを保持する保持部63aが形成されている。搬送ロボット60は、複数のケース10及びアタッチメント30が格納部63に格納された状態で移動することで、1回で複数のケース10及びアタッチメント30を搬送することができる。また、格納部63の上部には、ロボットアーム61が設けられている。ロボットアーム61の先端は、ケース10及びアタッチメント30を把持可能に形成されている。搬送ロボット60は、ロボットアーム61で格納部63に格納されるケース10及びアタッチメント30を部品実装装置100に装着する。これにより、搬送ロボット60は、1回の搬送により、複数の部品実装装置100に対してケース10及びアタッチメント30を装着することができる。なお、搬送ロボット60の形状、搬送方法は一例であり、上記に限定されない。搬送ロボット60は、ロボットアーム61で物体を支持または把持することで、当該物体を搬送してもよい。例えば、台車70または供給ユニット80を支持または把持して、搬送してもよい。例えば、第2制御装置50bは、実装ライン90に取付けられる供給ユニット80のケース10の部品の種類を一括して変更する場合、搬送ロボット60を制御して、事前に準備しておいた供給ユニット80を搬送させ、実装ライン90に取り付けられている供給ユニット80と交換させる。 As shown in FIG. 1C, the transfer robot 60 is composed of, for example, a traveling unit 62, a storage unit 63, and a robot arm 61. The traveling unit 62 includes wheels and a motor for driving the wheels. The case 10 and the attachment 30 are stored in the storage unit 63. The storage unit 63 is formed with, for example, a holding unit 63a for holding each of the plurality of cases 10 and the attachment 30. The transfer robot 60 can transfer the plurality of cases 10 and the attachments 30 at one time by moving the plurality of cases 10 and the attachments 30 in a state of being stored in the storage unit 63. A robot arm 61 is provided above the storage unit 63. The tip of the robot arm 61 is formed so that the case 10 and the attachment 30 can be gripped. The transfer robot 60 mounts the case 10 and the attachment 30 stored in the storage unit 63 by the robot arm 61 on the component mounting device 100. As a result, the transfer robot 60 can attach the case 10 and the attachment 30 to the plurality of component mounting devices 100 by one transfer. The shape and transfer method of the transfer robot 60 are examples, and are not limited to the above. The transport robot 60 may transport the object by supporting or gripping the object with the robot arm 61. For example, the dolly 70 or the supply unit 80 may be supported or gripped and conveyed. For example, when the second control device 50b collectively changes the types of parts of the case 10 of the supply unit 80 mounted on the mounting line 90, the second control device 50b controls the transfer robot 60 and prepares the supply unit in advance. The 80 is conveyed and replaced with the supply unit 80 attached to the mounting line 90.
 このように、実装システム1は、部品の補給及び部品の種類の変更を統合制御装置50が管理するシステムである。 As described above, the mounting system 1 is a system in which the integrated control device 50 manages the supply of parts and the change of the type of parts.
 ここで、供給ユニット80が取り付けられる部品実装装置100について、図2を参照しながら説明する。図2は、本実施の形態に係る部品実装装置100の構成を示す図である。なお、部品実装装置100は、基板103に部品を実装する装置である例について説明する。部品実装装置100は、部品を供給するフィーダから部品を取り出して基板103に移送搭載する機能を有する。なお、基板103は、部品が実装される対象物の一例である。 Here, the component mounting device 100 to which the supply unit 80 is attached will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing a configuration of a component mounting device 100 according to the present embodiment. An example in which the component mounting device 100 is a device for mounting components on the board 103 will be described. The component mounting device 100 has a function of taking out components from a feeder that supplies the components and transferring and mounting the components on the board 103. The substrate 103 is an example of an object on which components are mounted.
 図2に示すように、部品実装装置100は、供給ユニット80と、基台101と、基板搬送機構102と、実装ヘッド107を含む部品実装機構108と、基板認識カメラ109と、部品認識カメラ110と、電源部111(図1B参照)とを備える。 As shown in FIG. 2, the component mounting device 100 includes a supply unit 80, a base 101, a board transfer mechanism 102, a component mounting mechanism 108 including a mounting head 107, a board recognition camera 109, and a component recognition camera 110. And a power supply unit 111 (see FIG. 1B).
 基板搬送機構102は、基台101の中央付近にX軸に沿って(基板103の搬送方向)に配設されている。基板搬送機構102は、上流側から搬入された基板103をX軸に沿った方向に搬送し、部品実装作業を実行するために設定された実装ステージに位置決めして保持する。供給ユニット80は、部品実装装置100の本体部である基台101の供給ユニット装着部(図示せず)に着脱自在に装着されている。より具体的には、供給ユニット80には、供給ユニット80を構成する台車70が供給ユニット装着部に装着されている。本実施の形態において、供給ユニット装着部は基板搬送機構102の両側設けられており、供給ユニット80も基板搬送機構102の両側に配置されている。それぞれの供給ユニット80には複数のフィーダ20がY軸に沿って並列に配置可能であり、少なくとも1つのフィーダ20(バルクフィーダ)が並列に装着されている。フィーダ20は、例えば、フィーダ本体部40とアタッチメント30とを含んで構成される。なお、基板搬送機構102は、基板搬送部の一例である。また、供給ユニット80が基台101に装着されることで、供給ユニット80が有する各機能部(例えば、後述する振動発生部41、駆動部45及び読取装置130など)と電源部111とが電気的に接続され、電源部111から供給ユニット80の各機能部に電力が供給される。 The substrate transfer mechanism 102 is arranged near the center of the base 101 along the X axis (in the transfer direction of the substrate 103). The board transfer mechanism 102 transports the board 103 carried in from the upstream side in the direction along the X-axis, and positions and holds the board 103 on the mounting stage set for executing the component mounting work. The supply unit 80 is detachably mounted on a supply unit mounting portion (not shown) of the base 101, which is the main body of the component mounting device 100. More specifically, in the supply unit 80, a dolly 70 constituting the supply unit 80 is mounted on the supply unit mounting portion. In the present embodiment, the supply unit mounting portions are provided on both sides of the substrate transfer mechanism 102, and the supply unit 80 is also arranged on both sides of the substrate transfer mechanism 102. A plurality of feeders 20 can be arranged in parallel along the Y axis in each supply unit 80, and at least one feeder 20 (bulk feeder) is mounted in parallel. The feeder 20 includes, for example, a feeder main body 40 and an attachment 30. The substrate transfer mechanism 102 is an example of a substrate transfer unit. Further, when the supply unit 80 is mounted on the base 101, each functional unit (for example, a vibration generating unit 41, a driving unit 45, a reading device 130, etc., which will be described later) and a power supply unit 111 of the supply unit 80 are electrically connected. Power is supplied from the power supply unit 111 to each functional unit of the supply unit 80.
 供給ユニット80に配置されたフィーダ20は、部品実装機構108の実装ヘッド107による取り出し位置に部品を供給する。なお、実装ヘッド107は、部品実装部の一例である。 The feeder 20 arranged in the supply unit 80 supplies the components to the take-out position by the mounting head 107 of the component mounting mechanism 108. The mounting head 107 is an example of a component mounting unit.
 基台101の上面においてY軸マイナス方向の端部には、リニア駆動機構を備えたX軸移動テーブル105がX軸方向に配設されており、X軸移動テーブル105には、同様にリニア駆動機構を備えた2基のY軸移動テーブル106が、X軸方向に移動自在に結合されている。2基のY軸移動テーブル106には、それぞれ実装ヘッド107がY軸方向に移動自在に装着されている。 An X-axis moving table 105 provided with a linear drive mechanism is arranged in the X-axis direction on the upper surface of the base 101 at the end in the minus direction of the Y-axis, and the X-axis moving table 105 is similarly linearly driven. Two Y-axis moving tables 106 equipped with a mechanism are movably connected in the X-axis direction. A mounting head 107 is mounted on each of the two Y-axis moving tables 106 so as to be movable in the Y-axis direction.
 実装ヘッド107は、供給ユニット80に配置されたフィーダ20により保持される部品を基板103に搭載する。実装ヘッド107には、部品を吸着して保持し個別に昇降可能な部品吸着ノズル(図示しない)が装着されている。実装ヘッド107は、部品吸着ノズルを昇降させるZ軸昇降機構及び部品吸着ノズルをノズル軸廻りに回転させるθ軸回転機構を備えている。 The mounting head 107 mounts a component held by the feeder 20 arranged in the supply unit 80 on the substrate 103. The mounting head 107 is equipped with a component suction nozzle (not shown) that sucks and holds the component and can be raised and lowered individually. The mounting head 107 includes a Z-axis elevating mechanism for raising and lowering the component suction nozzle and a θ-axis rotation mechanism for rotating the component suction nozzle around the nozzle axis.
 X軸移動テーブル105、及び、Y軸移動テーブル106を駆動することにより、実装ヘッド107はX軸方向及びY軸方向に移動する。これにより2つの実装ヘッド107は、それぞれ対応した供給ユニット80に配置されたフィーダ20の取り出し位置から部品を部品吸着ノズルによって取り出す。なお、基板搬送機構102、X軸移動テーブル105、Y軸移動テーブル106及び実装ヘッド107により、部品実装機構108が構成される。 By driving the X-axis moving table 105 and the Y-axis moving table 106, the mounting head 107 moves in the X-axis direction and the Y-axis direction. As a result, the two mounting heads 107 take out the parts from the take-out positions of the feeders 20 arranged in the corresponding supply units 80 by the parts suction nozzles. The component mounting mechanism 108 is configured by the substrate transfer mechanism 102, the X-axis moving table 105, the Y-axis moving table 106, and the mounting head 107.
 上側及び下側の台車70のそれぞれと基板搬送機構102との間には、部品認識カメラ110が配設されている。供給ユニット80に配置されたフィーダ20から部品を取り出した実装ヘッド107が部品認識カメラ110の上方を移動する際に、部品認識カメラ110は実装ヘッド107に保持された状態の部品を撮像する。この撮像結果を処理部(図示しない)の画像認識によって認識処理することにより、部品の識別及び位置検出が行われる。 A component recognition camera 110 is arranged between each of the upper and lower carriages 70 and the board transfer mechanism 102. When the mounting head 107 from which the component is taken out from the feeder 20 arranged in the supply unit 80 moves above the component recognition camera 110, the component recognition camera 110 takes an image of the component held by the mounting head 107. By recognizing this imaging result by image recognition of a processing unit (not shown), component identification and position detection are performed.
 実装ヘッド107には、Y軸移動テーブル106の下面側に位置して、それぞれ実装ヘッド107と一体的に移動する基板認識カメラ109が装着されている。実装ヘッド107が移動することにより、基板認識カメラ109は基板搬送機構102に位置決めされた基板103の上方に移動し、基板103を撮像する。この撮像結果を同様に処理部の画像認識によって認識処理することにより基板103の位置が検出される。 The mounting head 107 is equipped with a board recognition camera 109 that is located on the lower surface side of the Y-axis moving table 106 and moves integrally with the mounting head 107. When the mounting head 107 moves, the board recognition camera 109 moves above the board 103 positioned by the board transfer mechanism 102 and takes an image of the board 103. The position of the substrate 103 is detected by recognizing the image pickup result by the image recognition of the processing unit in the same manner.
 電源部111は、部品実装装置100の各機能部に電力を供給する。電源部111は、例えば、基板搬送機構102に配置された供給ユニット80に電力を供給する。具体的には、電源部111は、供給ユニット80の振動発生部41、駆動部45、読取装置130などに電力を供給する。また、電源部111は、外部の電源と接続されていてもよい。なお、電源部111は、第1制御装置50aの制御により各機能部に電力を供給してもよいが、これに限定されない。 The power supply unit 111 supplies electric power to each functional unit of the component mounting device 100. The power supply unit 111 supplies electric power to the supply unit 80 arranged in the substrate transfer mechanism 102, for example. Specifically, the power supply unit 111 supplies electric power to the vibration generating unit 41, the driving unit 45, the reading device 130, and the like of the supply unit 80. Further, the power supply unit 111 may be connected to an external power supply. The power supply unit 111 may supply electric power to each functional unit under the control of the first control device 50a, but the power supply unit 111 is not limited to this.
 [1-2.実装システムの構成]
 以下では、上記の実装システム1の概要で説明した構成要素のうち、本開示において特に重要な構成について詳細に説明する。図1Bは、本実施の形態に係る実装システム1の機能構成を示すブロック図である。図3は、本実施の形態に係る供給ユニット80を模式的に示す図である。図4は、本実施の形態に係るケース10、アタッチメント30及びフィーダ本体部40それぞれを取り外した状態を示す図である。なお、図3では、供給ユニット80が実装ライン90に取り付けられたときに、アタッチメント30が有する搬送部34上を振動発生部41により発生する振動によって搬送された部品を保持して取り出す実装ヘッド107も図示している。保持は、吸着又は把持の少なくとも1つを含む。また、図3では、ケース10のカバー11は開いている状態を示す。
[1-2. Implementation system configuration]
In the following, among the components described in the outline of the mounting system 1 described above, particularly important configurations in the present disclosure will be described in detail. FIG. 1B is a block diagram showing a functional configuration of the mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 3 is a diagram schematically showing a supply unit 80 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a state in which the case 10, the attachment 30, and the feeder main body 40 according to the present embodiment are removed. In FIG. 3, when the supply unit 80 is attached to the mounting line 90, the mounting head 107 holds and takes out the parts conveyed by the vibration generated by the vibration generating unit 41 on the conveying unit 34 of the attachment 30. Is also illustrated. Retention comprises at least one of adsorption or grip. Further, FIG. 3 shows a state in which the cover 11 of the case 10 is open.
 図1B、図3及び図4に示すように、実装システム1は、機能構成として、振動発生部41と、駆動部45と、統合制御装置50と、第1制御装置50aと、第2制御装置50bと、搬送ロボット60と、実装ヘッド107と、電源部111と、読取装置130と、センサ140と、部品検出部141と、RFタグTと、部品保管庫Wに設けられたリーダライタRWとを備える。図3に示すように、振動発生部41及び駆動部45は、フィーダ本体部40に設けられ、電源部111は、部品実装装置100に設けられ、読取装置130は、台車70に設けられる。また、RFタグTは、ケース10が有するRFタグT2、アタッチメント30が有するRFタグT3、フィーダ本体部40が有するRFタグT1、及び、ロール体ケース120が有するRFタグT4を含む。 As shown in FIGS. 1B, 3 and 4, the mounting system 1 has a vibration generating unit 41, a driving unit 45, an integrated control device 50, a first control device 50a, and a second control device as functional configurations. 50b, a transfer robot 60, a mounting head 107, a power supply unit 111, a reading device 130, a sensor 140, a component detection unit 141, an RF tag T, and a reader / writer RW provided in the component storage W. To prepare for. As shown in FIG. 3, the vibration generating unit 41 and the driving unit 45 are provided in the feeder main body unit 40, the power supply unit 111 is provided in the component mounting device 100, and the reading device 130 is provided in the carriage 70. Further, the RF tag T includes the RF tag T2 of the case 10, the RF tag T3 of the attachment 30, the RF tag T1 of the feeder main body 40, and the RF tag T4 of the roll case 120.
 [1-2-1.ケース]
 さらに図5を参照しながら、ケース10について説明する。図5は、本実施の形態に係るケース10の外観を示す斜視図である。なお、図5では、係合部13の図示を省略している。
[1-2-1. Case]
Further, the case 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a perspective view showing the appearance of the case 10 according to the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, the engaging portion 13 is not shown.
 図3~図5に示すように、ケース10は、カバー11と、ケース本体部12と、係合部13と、第1の凸部14と、カバー17(図6参照)と、第2の凸部18と、RFタグT2とを有する。また、ケース本体部12には、開口15と、切り欠き部19とが形成されている。 As shown in FIGS. 3 to 5, the case 10 includes a cover 11, a case main body 12, an engaging portion 13, a first convex portion 14, a cover 17 (see FIG. 6), and a second. It has a convex portion 18 and an RF tag T2. Further, the case main body portion 12 is formed with an opening 15 and a notch portion 19.
 カバー11は、開口15を覆い、ケース10内に他の部品が混入することを防止する。カバー11は、収容室12aからフィーダ20に部品を供給するための開口15に設けられる。カバー11は、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられていない状態では、開口15を覆っている。また、カバー11は、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられ、かつ、当該ケース10が当該アタッチメント30に取り付けられるケースであるかの照合が行われ、照合が成功した場合に開けられる。照合が行われることで、さらにフィーダ20における部品の混入を抑制することができる。なお、カバー11は、第1カバーの一例である。 The cover 11 covers the opening 15 to prevent other parts from being mixed into the case 10. The cover 11 is provided in the opening 15 for supplying parts from the storage chamber 12a to the feeder 20. The cover 11 covers the opening 15 when the case 10 is not attached to the attachment 30. Further, the cover 11 is opened when collation is performed to see if the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 and the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30, and the collation is successful. By performing the collation, it is possible to further suppress the mixing of parts in the feeder 20. The cover 11 is an example of the first cover.
 図6は、本実施の形態に係るケース10のカバー11の開閉を説明するための第1図である。 FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining the opening and closing of the cover 11 of the case 10 according to the present embodiment.
 図6の(a)は、図5の破線領域Rを拡大して示す図であり、ケース10のカバー11が閉じている状態(閉状態)を示す。例えば、ケース10がアタッチメント30から取り外されている、又は、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられているが照合中である、もしくは照合が失敗した場合に、図6の(a)に示すようにカバー11は閉状態となる。 FIG. 6A is an enlarged view showing the broken line region R in FIG. 5, and shows a state in which the cover 11 of the case 10 is closed (closed state). For example, if the case 10 is removed from the attachment 30, or the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 but is being collated, or the collation fails, the cover is shown in FIG. 6 (a). 11 is in the closed state.
 図6の(a)に示すように、カバー11は、回転軸Jに対して回転可能にケース本体部12に支持される。また、ケース本体部12は、カバー11の一端部11aを、ケース10の外方側から覆うカバー17を有する。カバー17は、ケース10の外方からケース10の一端部11aを触ることができないようにする、つまり作業者などが容易にケース10のカバー11を開けないようにするために設けられる。これにより、ケース10内に他の部品が混入することを抑制することができる。カバー17は、例えば、板状である。 As shown in FIG. 6A, the cover 11 is rotatably supported by the case body 12 with respect to the rotation axis J. Further, the case main body portion 12 has a cover 17 that covers one end portion 11a of the cover 11 from the outer side of the case 10. The cover 17 is provided so that one end 11a of the case 10 cannot be touched from the outside of the case 10, that is, the cover 11 of the case 10 cannot be easily opened by an operator or the like. As a result, it is possible to prevent other parts from being mixed into the case 10. The cover 17 has, for example, a plate shape.
 カバー17には、貫通孔17aが形成されている。貫通孔17aは、カバー17をX軸方向(フィーダ20の長手方向)に貫通する。貫通孔17aは、アタッチメント30の被装着部32の棒体33に対応する位置に設けられ、棒体33が挿通可能な大きさであればよい。貫通孔17aは、例えば、作業者の指が入らない程度の大きさであるとよい。また、カバー11の貫通孔17aに対応する位置にシールが貼り付けられていてもよい。カバー11の貫通孔17aに棒体33が挿通されることにより、当該シールに穴があいた状態となる。つまり、シールは、ケース10が使用済みであるかどうかを見分けることができるように設けられる。 A through hole 17a is formed in the cover 17. The through hole 17a penetrates the cover 17 in the X-axis direction (longitudinal direction of the feeder 20). The through hole 17a may be provided at a position corresponding to the rod body 33 of the mounted portion 32 of the attachment 30, and may be of a size that allows the rod body 33 to be inserted. The through hole 17a may be, for example, of a size that does not allow a worker's finger to enter. Further, a sticker may be attached at a position corresponding to the through hole 17a of the cover 11. By inserting the rod 33 into the through hole 17a of the cover 11, the seal is in a state of having a hole. That is, the seal is provided so that it can be discerned whether the case 10 has been used or not.
 図6の(b)は、図5の破線領域Rを拡大して示す図であり、ケース10が被装着部32に装着されてケース10のカバー11が開いている状態(開状態)を示す。例えば、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられ、かつ、照合が成功した場合に、図6の(b)に示すようにカバー11は開状態となる。 FIG. 6B is an enlarged view showing the broken line region R of FIG. 5, and shows a state (open state) in which the case 10 is mounted on the mounted portion 32 and the cover 11 of the case 10 is open. .. For example, when the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 and the collation is successful, the cover 11 is opened as shown in FIG. 6B.
 第1制御装置50aは、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられ、かつ、照合が成功した場合、駆動部45を制御して、棒体33をケース10側に移動させる。これにより、棒体33はカバー17の貫通孔17aを挿通し、カバー11の一端部11aをX軸マイナス側に押し込む。これにより、図6の例では、カバー11は、回転軸Jを中心に、反時計回りに回転する。言い換えると、棒体33は、カバー11を押圧することで、回転軸Jを中心にカバー11を回転させる。 When the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 and the collation is successful, the first control device 50a controls the drive unit 45 to move the rod body 33 to the case 10 side. As a result, the rod body 33 inserts the through hole 17a of the cover 17 and pushes the one end portion 11a of the cover 11 toward the minus side of the X-axis. As a result, in the example of FIG. 6, the cover 11 rotates counterclockwise about the axis of rotation J. In other words, the rod body 33 presses the cover 11 to rotate the cover 11 about the rotation axis J.
 このように、カバー11は、ケース10が着脱される被装着部32の棒体33が物理的に作用することで閉状態から開状態となる。 As described above, the cover 11 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the physical action of the rod body 33 of the attached portion 32 to which the case 10 is attached / detached.
 なお、カバー11の開状態から閉状態への遷移は、棒体33がX軸プラス側に移動する(棒体33が被装着部32の内部に収容される)ことで実現されてもよい。この場合、第1制御装置50aが駆動部45を制御して棒体33をX軸プラス側に移動させるだけで、カバー11を閉状態とすることができる。カバー11が閉じられ得る状態となった際、駆動部45によって自動でカバー11を開状態から閉状態に遷移するため、作業性が向上する。 The transition from the open state to the closed state of the cover 11 may be realized by moving the rod body 33 to the X-axis plus side (the rod body 33 is housed inside the mounted portion 32). In this case, the cover 11 can be closed only by the first control device 50a controlling the drive unit 45 to move the rod body 33 to the X-axis plus side. When the cover 11 can be closed, the drive unit 45 automatically shifts the cover 11 from the open state to the closed state, so that workability is improved.
 なお、カバー11は、バネ等の弾性体(図示省略)によって閉状態となるように付勢されていてもよい。例えば、カバー11の一端部11aとは反対の他端部は弾性体によりX軸マイナス側に押し込まれ、カバー11は回転軸Jを中心に時計回り(図6の向きから見た場合)に回転する方向へ付勢されている。棒体33がX軸プラス側に移動する(被装着部32の内部に収容される)ことでカバー11が開状態から閉状態になり、カバー11はX軸マイナス側に付勢される。これにより、搬送ロボット60によりケース10が搬送されているときの揺れなどにより、カバー11が開閉することを抑制することができる。 The cover 11 may be urged to be closed by an elastic body such as a spring (not shown). For example, the other end of the cover 11 opposite to the one end 11a is pushed to the minus side of the X-axis by an elastic body, and the cover 11 rotates clockwise (when viewed from the direction of FIG. 6) about the rotation axis J. It is being urged in the direction of When the rod body 33 moves to the plus side of the X-axis (is housed inside the mounted portion 32), the cover 11 changes from the open state to the closed state, and the cover 11 is urged to the minus side of the X-axis. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cover 11 from opening and closing due to shaking when the case 10 is being conveyed by the transfer robot 60.
 なお、カバー11の開状態には、複数の段階が設けられてもよい。つまり、開口15の開口度合が複数設けられてもよい。例えば、部品の供給量などに応じて、第1制御装置50aによりカバー11の開状態の段階が制御される。図7は、本実施の形態に係るケース10のカバー11の開閉を説明するための第2図である。図7は、図6の(b)におけるVII-VII線での断面の一例を部分的に示す図である。なお、図7では、棒体33は、図示を省略している。 Note that the open state of the cover 11 may be provided with a plurality of stages. That is, a plurality of opening degrees of the opening 15 may be provided. For example, the open state stage of the cover 11 is controlled by the first control device 50a according to the supply amount of parts and the like. FIG. 7 is a second diagram for explaining the opening and closing of the cover 11 of the case 10 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram partially showing an example of a cross section taken along line VII-VII in FIG. 6 (b). In FIG. 7, the rod body 33 is not shown.
 図7に示すように、ケース本体部12は、ケース本体部12と、カバー17とで一端部11aを囲む部分において、その内面から突出する複数の係止部12bを有する。図7では、5つの係止部12b1~12b5を有する例を図示しているが、係止部12bの数は特に限定されない。図7では、カバー11の一端部11aは、係止部12b4及び12b5により固定されている。なお、カバー11が閉状態である場合、カバー11の一端部11aは、係止部12b1とカバー17の内面(X軸マイナス側の面)とで固定されていてもよい。これにより、搬送ロボット60によりケース10が搬送されているときの揺れなどにより、カバー11が開閉することを抑制することができる。 As shown in FIG. 7, the case main body 12 has a plurality of locking portions 12b protruding from the inner surface of the case main body 12 and the cover 17 at a portion surrounding one end portion 11a. FIG. 7 illustrates an example of having five locking portions 12b1 to 12b5, but the number of locking portions 12b is not particularly limited. In FIG. 7, one end 11a of the cover 11 is fixed by the locking portions 12b4 and 12b5. When the cover 11 is in the closed state, one end portion 11a of the cover 11 may be fixed by the locking portion 12b1 and the inner surface (the surface on the minus side of the X-axis) of the cover 17. As a result, it is possible to prevent the cover 11 from opening and closing due to shaking when the case 10 is being conveyed by the transfer robot 60.
 カバー11が開状態になる際、カバー11が閉状態となるように付勢するために設けられる弾性体はロックされる。例えば、カバー11の一端部11aとは反対の他端部が弾性体によってX軸マイナス側に付勢されないように、弾性体のX軸マイナス側への移動が規制される。これにより、カバー11は、係止部12bが設けられることで、棒体33に押圧され続けなくても所望の開状態を維持することができる。第1制御装置50aは、棒体33によりカバー11を所望の開口度合まで開口させた後、棒体33を被装着部32に戻してもよい。これにより、棒体33が一端部11aを押圧し続けるために要する消費電力を削減することができる。また、棒体33の劣化を抑制することができる。 When the cover 11 is opened, the elastic body provided to urge the cover 11 to be closed is locked. For example, the movement of the elastic body to the negative side of the X-axis is restricted so that the other end of the cover 11 opposite to the one end 11a is not urged to the negative side of the X-axis by the elastic body. As a result, the cover 11 can maintain a desired open state even if it is not continuously pressed by the rod body 33 by providing the locking portion 12b. The first control device 50a may open the cover 11 to a desired degree of opening by the rod body 33, and then return the rod body 33 to the mounted portion 32. As a result, the power consumption required for the rod body 33 to continue pressing the one end portion 11a can be reduced. In addition, deterioration of the rod body 33 can be suppressed.
 ケース10がアタッチメント30から取り外される際、弾性体のロックは解除され、カバー11は閉状態となるように付勢される。なお、カバー11を閉状態にする機構は、これに限定されない。カバー11の一端部11aと反対側の一端部をX軸マイナス方向に押し込む棒体(図示省略)を設けてもよい。 When the case 10 is removed from the attachment 30, the elastic body is unlocked and the cover 11 is urged to be closed. The mechanism for closing the cover 11 is not limited to this. A rod body (not shown) that pushes one end of the cover 11 opposite to the one end 11a in the minus direction of the X-axis may be provided.
 また、カバー11は、係止部12bが設けられる場合、バネ等の弾性体によって閉状態となるように付勢されなくてもよい。つまり、係止部12bが設けられる場合、カバー11を閉状態とするための弾性体は、設けられなくてもよい。この場合、カバー11は、ケース10をアタッチメント30から取り外す際、開口15の開口度合が小さくなるように係止部12bによって係止められてもよい。 Further, when the locking portion 12b is provided, the cover 11 does not have to be urged to be closed by an elastic body such as a spring. That is, when the locking portion 12b is provided, the elastic body for closing the cover 11 may not be provided. In this case, the cover 11 may be locked by the locking portion 12b so that the opening degree of the opening 15 becomes smaller when the case 10 is removed from the attachment 30.
 図5を再び参照して、ケース本体部12は、バルク状態の部品を収容する収容体である。ケース本体部12は、例えば、長尺状の箱体である。ケース本体部12は、バルク状態の部品を収容する収容室12aを内部に有する。収容室12aは、開口15に向かって下方(図5の例では、Z軸マイナス方向)に傾斜する傾斜面16を有する。傾斜面16の傾斜角度は特に限定されず、振動発生部41が振動することで収容室12aの部品が傾斜面16に沿って移動し、アタッチメント30に供給可能であればよい。 With reference to FIG. 5 again, the case main body portion 12 is an accommodating body for accommodating parts in a bulk state. The case body 12 is, for example, a long box body. The case main body 12 has a storage chamber 12a for accommodating parts in a bulk state. The accommodation chamber 12a has an inclined surface 16 that inclines downward toward the opening 15 (in the example of FIG. 5, in the negative direction of the Z axis). The inclination angle of the inclined surface 16 is not particularly limited, and it is sufficient that the parts of the accommodation chamber 12a move along the inclined surface 16 due to the vibration of the vibration generating portion 41 and can be supplied to the attachment 30.
 収容室12aが傾斜面16を有することで、アタッチメント30に部品を供給しやすくなるとともに、収容室12aとケース本体部12の外壁との間に空間を形成することができる。本実施の形態では、当該空間にRFタグT2が配置される。RFタグT2は、例えば、ケース本体部12の内部であって、収容室12aの下方に配置される。また、RFタグT2は、長尺状であり、長手方向がケース本体部12の長手方向と一致するようにケース本体部12に配置される。これにより、RFタグT2が取り付けられる取付面12cの面積を増やすことなく、長尺状であるRFタグT2を取付面12cに取り付けやすくなる。 Since the accommodation chamber 12a has the inclined surface 16, it becomes easy to supply parts to the attachment 30, and a space can be formed between the accommodation chamber 12a and the outer wall of the case main body portion 12. In the present embodiment, the RF tag T2 is arranged in the space. The RF tag T2 is arranged, for example, inside the case main body 12 and below the storage chamber 12a. Further, the RF tag T2 has a long shape and is arranged on the case main body 12 so that the longitudinal direction coincides with the longitudinal direction of the case main body 12. This makes it easier to attach the long RF tag T2 to the attachment surface 12c without increasing the area of the attachment surface 12c to which the RF tag T2 is attached.
 係合部13は、アタッチメント30に対してケース10を固定するために、ケース本体部12の下面(Z軸マイナス側の面)に形成された凹みである。係合部13は、アタッチメント30の被装着部32の爪部37に対応する位置に設けられ、当該爪部37と係合する。つまり、係合部13と爪部37とが係合することで、アタッチメント30に対してケース10が固定される。 The engaging portion 13 is a recess formed on the lower surface (the surface on the minus side of the Z axis) of the case main body portion 12 in order to fix the case 10 to the attachment 30. The engaging portion 13 is provided at a position corresponding to the claw portion 37 of the mounted portion 32 of the attachment 30, and engages with the claw portion 37. That is, the case 10 is fixed to the attachment 30 by engaging the engaging portion 13 and the claw portion 37.
 なお、ケース10及びアタッチメント30への他の部品の混入を抑制する観点から、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられた後、容易にケース10を取り外せないとよい。例えば、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられた後、爪部37の移動(例えば、Z軸方向への移動)が駆動部45により規制されてもよい。これにより、作業者が誤ってアタッチメント30からケース10を取り外してしまうことで部品が混入することを抑制することができる。例えば、作業者がアタッチメント30からケース10を取り外した後、当該アタッチメント30に対応する部品以外の部品を収容するケース10が当該アタッチメント30に取り付けられてしまうことを抑制することができる。なお、駆動部45の規制を解除することで、ケース10からアタッチメント30を取り外すことは可能である。 From the viewpoint of suppressing the mixing of other parts into the case 10 and the attachment 30, it is preferable that the case 10 cannot be easily removed after the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30. For example, after the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30, the movement of the claw portion 37 (for example, the movement in the Z-axis direction) may be restricted by the drive portion 45. As a result, it is possible to prevent the parts from being mixed by the operator accidentally removing the case 10 from the attachment 30. For example, after the operator removes the case 10 from the attachment 30, it is possible to prevent the case 10 containing parts other than the parts corresponding to the attachment 30 from being attached to the attachment 30. It is possible to remove the attachment 30 from the case 10 by removing the regulation of the drive unit 45.
 第1の凸部14は、搬送ロボット60がケース10を供給ユニット80のアタッチメント30に取付ける際に、ロボットアーム61により把持される部分である。第1の凸部14は、例えば、ケース本体部12のX軸マイナス側の壁面からX軸マイナス側に突出するように設けられる。第1の凸部14には、ロボットアーム61が第1の凸部14を把持するときの把持位置を決める位置決め部14aを有する。位置決め部14aは、例えば、第1の凸部14の上下面に形成された一対の凹みである。図8は、本実施の形態に係るケース10を搬送ロボット60が把持する様子を模式的に示す図である。図8の(a)は、Y軸マイナス側からY軸プラス側を見たときのケース10及びロボットアーム61を模式的に示す図であり、図8の(b)は、X軸プラス側からX軸マイナス側を見たときのケース10及びロボットアーム61を模式的に示す図である。 The first convex portion 14 is a portion gripped by the robot arm 61 when the transfer robot 60 attaches the case 10 to the attachment 30 of the supply unit 80. The first convex portion 14 is provided so as to project from the wall surface on the minus side of the X axis of the case main body portion 12 to the minus side of the X axis, for example. The first convex portion 14 has a positioning portion 14a that determines a gripping position when the robot arm 61 grips the first convex portion 14. The positioning portion 14a is, for example, a pair of recesses formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the first convex portion 14. FIG. 8 is a diagram schematically showing how the transfer robot 60 grips the case 10 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing the case 10 and the robot arm 61 when the Y-axis plus side is viewed from the Y-axis minus side, and FIG. 8B is a diagram schematically showing the case 10 and the robot arm 61 from the X-axis plus side. It is a figure which shows typically the case 10 and the robot arm 61 when the X-axis minus side is seen.
 図8の(a)に示すように、本実施の形態では、凹みである位置決め部14aは、四角錐などの穴奥部に向かって断面積が小さくなる形状を有する。また、図8の(a)及び図8の(b)に示すように、本実施の形態では、ロボットアーム61は、位置決め部14aに嵌合する嵌合部61aを有する。嵌合部61aは、位置決め部14aの凹みの形状に応じた形状を有し、例えば、位置決め部14aの穴側面に接する形状を有する。これにより、ケース10を搬送ロボット60がロボットアーム61で把持しようとした場合に、位置決め部14aと嵌合部61aとの位置が完全に一致していなくても、ロボットアーム61が把持する力により、嵌合部61aの中心と、位置決め部14aの中心とが一致するように移動する。よって、搬送ロボット60は、ケース10を正確に把持することができる。また、搬送ロボット60は、ケース10に位置決め部14aが設けられることで、ケース10を搬送中に当該ケース10が落下することを抑制することができる。 As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the positioning portion 14a, which is a recess, has a shape in which the cross-sectional area becomes smaller toward the inner part of a hole such as a quadrangular pyramid. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, in the present embodiment, the robot arm 61 has a fitting portion 61a to be fitted to the positioning portion 14a. The fitting portion 61a has a shape corresponding to the shape of the recess of the positioning portion 14a, and has, for example, a shape in contact with the side surface of the hole of the positioning portion 14a. As a result, when the transfer robot 60 tries to grip the case 10 with the robot arm 61, even if the positions of the positioning portion 14a and the fitting portion 61a do not completely match, the force gripped by the robot arm 61 causes the case 10. , The center of the fitting portion 61a and the center of the positioning portion 14a move so as to coincide with each other. Therefore, the transfer robot 60 can accurately grip the case 10. Further, the transfer robot 60 can prevent the case 10 from falling while the case 10 is being conveyed by providing the case 10 with the positioning portion 14a.
 なお、第1の凸部14が設けられる位置は、搬送ロボット60がケース10を把持可能であれば、図5に示す位置に限定されない。第1の凸部14は、例えば、ケース本体部12のZ軸プラス側の壁面(上面)からZ軸プラス側に突出するように設けられてもよい。また、位置決め部14aは、凹みであることに限定されず、凸部であってもよいし、他の部分と摩擦係数が異なる部分であってもよい。 The position where the first convex portion 14 is provided is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 5 as long as the transfer robot 60 can grip the case 10. The first convex portion 14 may be provided, for example, so as to project from the wall surface (upper surface) on the Z-axis plus side of the case main body portion 12 toward the Z-axis plus side. Further, the positioning portion 14a is not limited to being a concave portion, and may be a convex portion or a portion having a friction coefficient different from that of other portions.
 図5を再び参照して、第2の凸部18は、ケース10をアタッチメント30に取り付けた状態では、アタッチメント30に設けられるガイド部(図9に示すガイド部39)と係合する部分である。図9に示すように、第2の凸部18は、ケース10の下面からZ軸マイナス側に突出して設けられる。第2の凸部18は、ケース10をアタッチメント30に取付けた状態では、フィーダ20のアタッチメント30のガイド部39に係合する。これにより、ケース10はアタッチメント30に固定装着される。第2の凸部18は、例えば、ケース本体部12の下面にケース10の長手方向に長い切り欠き部19が形成されることにより、第2の凸部18が形成される。また、第2の凸部18におけるケース10の長手方向の長さ(X軸方向の長さ)は、ケース10の長手方向の長さより短いが、これに限定されない。また、第2の凸部18は、ケース10の下面のうち、開口15側に配置される。第2の凸部18は、例えば、平面視において、RFタグT2と重ならない位置に設けられてもよい。図9は、本実施の形態に係るケース10が取り付けられたフィーダ20を、ケース10の長手方向から見たときの模式図である。図9は、図3におけるIX-IX線での断面の一例を部分的に示す図である。 With reference to FIG. 5 again, the second convex portion 18 is a portion that engages with the guide portion (guide portion 39 shown in FIG. 9) provided in the attachment 30 when the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30. .. As shown in FIG. 9, the second convex portion 18 is provided so as to project from the lower surface of the case 10 to the negative side of the Z axis. The second convex portion 18 engages with the guide portion 39 of the attachment 30 of the feeder 20 in a state where the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30. As a result, the case 10 is fixedly attached to the attachment 30. The second convex portion 18 is formed, for example, by forming a long notch 19 in the longitudinal direction of the case 10 on the lower surface of the case main body portion 12. Further, the length in the longitudinal direction (length in the X-axis direction) of the case 10 in the second convex portion 18 is shorter than the length in the longitudinal direction of the case 10, but is not limited thereto. Further, the second convex portion 18 is arranged on the opening 15 side of the lower surface of the case 10. The second convex portion 18 may be provided at a position that does not overlap with the RF tag T2 in a plan view, for example. FIG. 9 is a schematic view of the feeder 20 to which the case 10 according to the present embodiment is attached when viewed from the longitudinal direction of the case 10. FIG. 9 is a diagram partially showing an example of a cross section taken along the line IX-IX in FIG.
 図9に示すように、第2の凸部18は、フィーダ20のアタッチメント30のガイド部39に係合する。ケース10をアタッチメントに取付ける際、第2の凸部18をガイド部39に沿って取付けることにより、ケース10をアタッチメント30に取り付ける際の作業性が向上する。 As shown in FIG. 9, the second convex portion 18 engages with the guide portion 39 of the attachment 30 of the feeder 20. When the case 10 is attached to the attachment, the second convex portion 18 is attached along the guide portion 39, so that the workability when attaching the case 10 to the attachment 30 is improved.
 また、第2の凸部18の幅w1は、ケース10の幅w2よりも短い。これにより、第2の凸部18の幅w1がケース10の幅w2と同じ場合に比べて、ケース10のw2の幅を大きくすることができる。例えば、ケース10の幅w2を、アタッチメント30の幅と等しくすることができる。これにより、収容室12aの収容量を増やすことができる。また、第2の凸部の幅w1は、後述する台車70の保持部71の幅(Y軸方向の長さ)より小さくてもよい。このとき、例えば、ケース10の幅w2は、保持部71の幅と同じであってもよい。これにより、開口15の幅を大きくすることができるので、開口15での部品の詰まりを抑制することができる。 Further, the width w1 of the second convex portion 18 is shorter than the width w2 of the case 10. Thereby, the width of w2 of the case 10 can be increased as compared with the case where the width w1 of the second convex portion 18 is the same as the width w2 of the case 10. For example, the width w2 of the case 10 can be made equal to the width of the attachment 30. Thereby, the accommodation capacity of the accommodation chamber 12a can be increased. Further, the width w1 of the second convex portion may be smaller than the width (length in the Y-axis direction) of the holding portion 71 of the carriage 70, which will be described later. At this time, for example, the width w2 of the case 10 may be the same as the width of the holding portion 71. As a result, the width of the opening 15 can be increased, so that clogging of parts at the opening 15 can be suppressed.
 また、第2の凸部18の断面形状は、矩形状であってもよいし、T字形状(T字スロット形状)であってもよい。第2の凸部18の断面形状がT字形状であることで、ケース10を上下方向(Z軸方向)にも固定することができる。なお、第2の凸部18の断面形状はこれに限定されず、例えば、くさび形(Z軸マイナス側に向かうほど先細りとなるくさび形)であってもよいし、その他の形状であってもよい。 Further, the cross-sectional shape of the second convex portion 18 may be a rectangular shape or a T-shaped shape (T-shaped slot shape). Since the cross-sectional shape of the second convex portion 18 is T-shaped, the case 10 can be fixed in the vertical direction (Z-axis direction) as well. The cross-sectional shape of the second convex portion 18 is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a wedge shape (a wedge shape that tapers toward the minus side of the Z axis) or any other shape. good.
 また、切り欠き部19は、ケース10の長手方向から見たときに、ケース10の下面の両端側(Y軸プラス側及びYマイナス側)に形成される例について説明したが、これに限定されず、一端側のみに形成されてもよいし、Y軸方向の中央の位置に形成されてもよい。 Further, the example in which the notch portion 19 is formed on both end sides (Y-axis plus side and Y-minus side) of the lower surface of the case 10 when viewed from the longitudinal direction of the case 10 has been described, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, it may be formed only on one end side, or may be formed at a central position in the Y-axis direction.
 RFタグT2には、RFタグT2が取り付けられたケース10に収容されている部品に関する情報が記憶される。RFタグT2には、例えば、部品の種類を示す情報(識別情報)、数量(残数)を示す情報、使用期限を示す情報などのタグ情報が記憶される。RFタグT2は、例えば、部品メーカからケース10が納入された時点で既に当該ケース10に貼り付けられていてもよい。これにより、納入されたケース10を部品保管庫Wに保管することで、リーダライタRWを介して当該ケース10の部品に関する情報を取得することができる。RFタグT2には、部品保管庫Wのリーダライタにより、入庫日、管理番号等の情報を書込んでもよい。また、残量のないケース10は、RFタグT2に記憶されている情報が読取できないように処理されたうえで、廃棄エリアに搬送されてもよい。これにより、ケース10の再利用による部品混入を防止できる。RFタグT2は、第2のRFタグの一例である。 The RF tag T2 stores information about the parts housed in the case 10 to which the RF tag T2 is attached. The RF tag T2 stores, for example, tag information such as information indicating the type of parts (identification information), information indicating the quantity (remaining number), and information indicating the expiration date. The RF tag T2 may be attached to the case 10 already when the case 10 is delivered from the component manufacturer, for example. As a result, by storing the delivered case 10 in the parts storage W, it is possible to acquire information about the parts of the case 10 via the reader / writer RW. Information such as a warehousing date and a control number may be written in the RF tag T2 by the reader / writer of the parts storage W. Further, the case 10 having no remaining amount may be transported to the disposal area after being processed so that the information stored in the RF tag T2 cannot be read. This makes it possible to prevent parts from being mixed due to reuse of the case 10. The RF tag T2 is an example of a second RF tag.
 [1-2-2.アタッチメント]
 図3及び図4に示すように、フィーダ20は、ケース10が着脱可能(例えば、着脱自在)に装着され、部品を搬送するアタッチメント30と、当該アタッチメント30が着脱自在に取り付けられるフィーダ本体部40とを有する。フィーダ20は、フィーダ本体部40と、フィーダ本体部40に対して着脱可能であり、かつ、ケース10が着脱可能に取り付けられる被装着部32を有するアタッチメント30とを備えるとも言える。また、フィーダ20は、アタッチメント30とフィーダ本体部40とに分離可能であるとも言える。例えば、部品を搬送する搬送部(本実施の形態の搬送部34に相当)とフィーダ本体部(本実施の形態のフィーダ本体部に相当)とが一体化している場合、部品の種類によらず搬送部が共用される。この場合、前の生産に用いた部品が搬送部に残っている可能性があり、新たにフィーダ(本実施の形態のフィーダ20に相当)に取り付けたケースの部品と搬送部に残っている部品とが混在する可能性がある。このような混在は、特にフィーダ20により供給される部品を異なる種類の部品に変更して生産する場合に問題となりやすい。一方、本実施の形態に係るフィーダ20は、搬送部34を有するアタッチメント30とフィーダ本体部40とを分離可能であるので、搬送部34(アタッチメント30)を部品専用に設けることで、フィーダ20で複数の異なる種類の部品を供給する場合において、部品が混入することを抑制することができる。フィーダ20は、部品のサイズが小さい場合であっても、混入することを抑制することができる。フィーダ20は、長尺状であり、長手方向はX軸方向である。
[1-2-2. attachment]
As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the feeder 20 has a case 10 detachably attached (for example, detachable), an attachment 30 for transporting parts, and a feeder main body 40 to which the attachment 30 is detachably attached. And have. It can be said that the feeder 20 includes a feeder main body 40 and an attachment 30 having an attached portion 32 that is removable from the feeder main body 40 and to which the case 10 is detachably attached. Further, it can be said that the feeder 20 can be separated into the attachment 30 and the feeder main body 40. For example, when the transport unit for transporting parts (corresponding to the transport portion 34 of the present embodiment) and the feeder main body portion (corresponding to the feeder main body portion of the present embodiment) are integrated, regardless of the type of parts. The transport unit is shared. In this case, the parts used in the previous production may remain in the transport unit, and the parts of the case newly attached to the feeder (corresponding to the feeder 20 of the present embodiment) and the parts remaining in the transport unit. And may be mixed. Such a mixture tends to be a problem especially when the parts supplied by the feeder 20 are changed to different types of parts for production. On the other hand, in the feeder 20 according to the present embodiment, the attachment 30 having the transport portion 34 and the feeder main body portion 40 can be separated. Therefore, by providing the transport portion 34 (attachment 30) exclusively for the parts, the feeder 20 can be used. When supplying a plurality of different types of parts, it is possible to prevent the parts from being mixed. The feeder 20 can suppress mixing even when the size of the component is small. The feeder 20 has a long shape, and the longitudinal direction is the X-axis direction.
 また、図3及び図4に示すように、アタッチメント30は、被装着部32と、カバー32aと、棒体33と、搬送部34と、カバー35と、爪部37と、凸部38と、ガイド部39(図9参照)と、RFタグT3とを有する。本実施の形態では、被装着部32と搬送部34とが一体的に形成されている。また、アタッチメント30には、ケース10の開口15に対応する位置に開口32bが形成され、実装ヘッド107により部品が取り出される位置に開口35aが形成されている。 Further, as shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the attachment 30 includes a mounted portion 32, a cover 32a, a rod body 33, a transport portion 34, a cover 35, a claw portion 37, and a convex portion 38. It has a guide unit 39 (see FIG. 9) and an RF tag T3. In the present embodiment, the mounted portion 32 and the transport portion 34 are integrally formed. Further, in the attachment 30, an opening 32b is formed at a position corresponding to the opening 15 of the case 10, and an opening 35a is formed at a position where a component is taken out by the mounting head 107.
 棒体33は、フィーダ本体部40に設けられる駆動部45によりX軸方向に沿って移動し、ケース10の開口15に設けられるカバー11に作用する作用部の一例である。 The rod body 33 is an example of an acting unit that moves along the X-axis direction by a driving unit 45 provided in the feeder main body 40 and acts on the cover 11 provided in the opening 15 of the case 10.
 被装着部32は、ケース10が着脱される部分であり、ケース10を固定し、かつ、ケース10のカバー11の開閉を行う。被装着部32には、カバー32aと、棒体33と、爪部37と、ガイド部39とが設けられる。 The mounted portion 32 is a portion to which the case 10 is attached and detached, fixes the case 10, and opens and closes the cover 11 of the case 10. The mounted portion 32 is provided with a cover 32a, a rod body 33, a claw portion 37, and a guide portion 39.
 カバー32aは、開口32bを覆い、アタッチメント30内に他の部品が混入することを防止する。カバー32aは、開口15と搬送部34との間に設けられる。カバー32aは、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられていない状態では、開口32bを覆っている。また、カバー32aは、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられ、当該ケース10が当該アタッチメント30に取り付けられるケースであるかの照合が行われ、照合が成功した場合に開けられる。なお、カバー32aの開閉は、例えば、駆動部45により行われてもよい。カバー32aは、ケース10が取付けられたアタッチメント30をフィーダ本体部40から取り外すときに、閉状態となってもよい。これにより、ケース10の部品が搬送部34へ侵入することを抑制することができる。 The cover 32a covers the opening 32b to prevent other parts from being mixed into the attachment 30. The cover 32a is provided between the opening 15 and the transport portion 34. The cover 32a covers the opening 32b when the case 10 is not attached to the attachment 30. Further, the cover 32a is opened when the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 and the case 10 is collated as to whether the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 and the collation is successful. The cover 32a may be opened and closed by, for example, the drive unit 45. The cover 32a may be closed when the attachment 30 to which the case 10 is attached is removed from the feeder main body 40. As a result, it is possible to prevent the parts of the case 10 from invading the transport unit 34.
 このように、被装着部32は、ケース10が被装着部32に装着された状態で、ケース10の開口15に対応する位置に形成される開口32bに設けられるカバー32aを有する。カバー32aは、第2カバーの一例である。 As described above, the mounted portion 32 has a cover 32a provided in the opening 32b formed at a position corresponding to the opening 15 of the case 10 in a state where the case 10 is mounted on the mounted portion 32. The cover 32a is an example of the second cover.
 棒体33は、カバー11を開閉するための開閉機構の一例であり、本実施の形態では、カバー11を押圧することで回転軸Jを中心にカバー11を回転させてカバー11を開閉する。例えば、カバー11を押圧することにより、ケース10の部品が搬送部34に供給可能な状態となる。棒体33は、例えば、カバー11の一端部11aを押圧可能な位置に配置される。なお、棒体33の形状は特に限定されない。また、棒体33は、一端部11aを押圧しないときは、被装着部32の内部に収容されているとよい。これにより、ケース10をアタッチメント30に取り付ける際などに、棒体33が一端部11aと接触することを抑制することができる。 The rod body 33 is an example of an opening / closing mechanism for opening / closing the cover 11. In the present embodiment, the cover 11 is rotated around the rotation axis J by pressing the cover 11 to open / close the cover 11. For example, by pressing the cover 11, the parts of the case 10 can be supplied to the transport unit 34. The rod body 33 is arranged, for example, at a position where one end portion 11a of the cover 11 can be pressed. The shape of the rod 33 is not particularly limited. Further, when the rod body 33 does not press the one end portion 11a, it is preferable that the rod body 33 is housed inside the mounted portion 32. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rod body 33 from coming into contact with the one end portion 11a when the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 or the like.
 このように、本実施の形態に係るアタッチメント30は、ケース10のカバー11を開閉するための開閉機構を有する。 As described above, the attachment 30 according to the present embodiment has an opening / closing mechanism for opening / closing the cover 11 of the case 10.
 爪部37は、ケース10をアタッチメント30に固定するために、被装着部32においてしたケース10の下面が接触する位置に設けられる凸部である。爪部37は、ケース10の係合部13と係合することで、ケース10をアタッチメント30に固定する。詳細は後述するが、爪部37は、被装着部32に収容される第1の位置と、被装着部32から突出する第2の位置との間で移動可能である。つまり、爪部37は、Z軸方向に移動可能である。図4では、爪部37は、第2の位置に固定されている例を示している。爪部37の第1の位置と第2の位置との移動は、例えば、駆動部45により行われてもよいし、ばねなどの弾性体により行われてもよい。 The claw portion 37 is a convex portion provided at a position where the lower surface of the case 10 in the mounted portion 32 comes into contact with the case 10 in order to fix the case 10 to the attachment 30. The claw portion 37 engages with the engaging portion 13 of the case 10 to fix the case 10 to the attachment 30. Although the details will be described later, the claw portion 37 can be moved between the first position accommodated in the mounted portion 32 and the second position protruding from the mounted portion 32. That is, the claw portion 37 can move in the Z-axis direction. FIG. 4 shows an example in which the claw portion 37 is fixed at the second position. The movement of the claw portion 37 between the first position and the second position may be performed by, for example, the drive unit 45 or an elastic body such as a spring.
 爪部37をY軸方向から見たときの形状は、例えば、三角形であり、図4では、直角三角形である。爪部37は、例えば、Y軸方向から見たときに、開口32b側に向かうにつれ傾斜が高くなる(図4の例では、直角三角形の斜辺が右上がりとなる)ように、形成されてもよい。 The shape of the claw portion 37 when viewed from the Y-axis direction is, for example, a triangle, and in FIG. 4, it is a right triangle. Even if the claw portion 37 is formed, for example, when viewed from the Y-axis direction, the inclination increases toward the opening 32b side (in the example of FIG. 4, the hypotenuse of the right triangle rises to the right). good.
 ガイド部39は、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられた状態で、ケース10をアタッチメント30に固定装着するとともに、ケース10をアタッチメント30に取り付ける際のガイドとして機能する。ガイド部39は、ケース10の幅方向の両端を支持する支持部39aと、支持部39aの間の溝部39bとを備えた構成となっている。図9に示すように、支持部39aがケース10の下面を支持した状態では、ケース10の下面に突出して設けられた第2の凸部18がガイド部39と係合する。支持部39aは、切り欠き部19に対応した形状を有する。溝部39bの幅w3は、ケース10の幅w2よりも短い。支持部39aは、X軸方向から見たときに、被装着部32の両端からZ軸プラス側に突出して設けられる。 The guide portion 39 functions as a guide when the case 10 is fixedly attached to the attachment 30 and the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 in a state where the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30. The guide portion 39 is configured to include a support portion 39a that supports both ends of the case 10 in the width direction, and a groove portion 39b between the support portions 39a. As shown in FIG. 9, when the support portion 39a supports the lower surface of the case 10, the second convex portion 18 projecting from the lower surface of the case 10 engages with the guide portion 39. The support portion 39a has a shape corresponding to the notch portion 19. The width w3 of the groove portion 39b is shorter than the width w2 of the case 10. The support portion 39a is provided so as to project from both ends of the mounted portion 32 toward the Z-axis plus side when viewed from the X-axis direction.
 搬送部34は、ケース10から供給された部品を実装ヘッド107により取り出される位置まで搬送する。本実施の形態では、搬送部34は、振動発生部41が発生させる振動により部品を搬送する。搬送部34は、部品搬送部の一例である。 The transport unit 34 transports the parts supplied from the case 10 to the position where they are taken out by the mounting head 107. In the present embodiment, the transport unit 34 transports the parts by the vibration generated by the vibration generation unit 41. The transport unit 34 is an example of a component transport unit.
 図10は、本実施の形態に係る搬送部34による部品Pの搬送を説明するための図である。図10は、Z軸プラス側から搬送部34を見たときの様子を示す。 FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining the transfer of the component P by the transfer unit 34 according to the present embodiment. FIG. 10 shows a state when the transport unit 34 is viewed from the Z-axis plus side.
 図10に示すように、搬送部34は、ケース10から供給された部品Pが開口35aに向かうにつれ整列するように部品Pを搬送する。具体的には、搬送部34は、部品Pを整列させるためのガイド部34aを有しており、振動発生部41からの振動により当該ガイド部34aに沿って部品Pを搬送することで、部品Pを整列させる。ここでの整列とは、部品Pの向きが等しく、かつ、1列に並ぶことを意味する。なお、搬送部34は、部品Pが整列していなくても実装ヘッド107により取り出し可能であれば、部品Pを整列させなくてもよい。例えば、搬送部34は、ガイド部34aを有していなくてもよい。 As shown in FIG. 10, the transport unit 34 transports the component P so that the component P supplied from the case 10 is aligned toward the opening 35a. Specifically, the transport unit 34 has a guide portion 34a for aligning the parts P, and the parts P are transported along the guide portion 34a by the vibration from the vibration generating unit 41. Align P. Alignment here means that the parts P have the same orientation and are arranged in a row. The transport unit 34 does not have to align the parts P as long as it can be taken out by the mounting head 107 even if the parts P are not aligned. For example, the transport unit 34 does not have to have the guide unit 34a.
 図3及び図4を再び参照して、カバー35は、開口35aを覆う。カバー35は、実装ヘッド107により部品が取り出されるときに開状態となる。カバー35は、カバー11及び32aが開状態となった後に、開状態となる。カバー35の開閉は、例えば、駆動部45により行われてもよい。 With reference to FIGS. 3 and 4, the cover 35 covers the opening 35a. The cover 35 is opened when the component is taken out by the mounting head 107. The cover 35 is opened after the covers 11 and 32a are opened. The opening and closing of the cover 35 may be performed by, for example, the drive unit 45.
 図11Aは、本実施の形態に係るアタッチメント30のカバー35が開口している状態を示す図である。図11Bは、本実施の形態に係るアタッチメント30のカバー35が閉じた状態を示す図である。図11Cは、本実施の形態に係るアタッチメント30のカバー35が閉じてロックされた状態を示す図である。 FIG. 11A is a diagram showing a state in which the cover 35 of the attachment 30 according to the present embodiment is open. FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a state in which the cover 35 of the attachment 30 according to the present embodiment is closed. FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a state in which the cover 35 of the attachment 30 according to the present embodiment is closed and locked.
 図11Aに示すように、カバー35がX軸プラス方向にスライドすることで、開状態となる。つまり、開口35aから部品が露出する。この状態で、実装ヘッド107により、開口35aの位置まで搬送された部品が取り出される。 As shown in FIG. 11A, the cover 35 slides in the plus direction of the X-axis to open the cover 35. That is, the parts are exposed from the opening 35a. In this state, the mounting head 107 takes out the parts conveyed to the position of the opening 35a.
 なお、アタッチメント30のY軸プラス側の面には、Y軸マイナス方向の厚みが異なる第1部分30a、第2部分30b、及び、第3部分30cが形成されている。第1部分30aは、カバー35がスライドするときにカバー35の内面と接触する面である。第2部分30bは、第1部分30aより肉厚な部分である。第3部分30cは、第2部分30bより肉厚な部分である。例えば、第1部分30a、第2部分30b及び第3部分30cは、階段状に形成されている。なお、第1部分30a、第2部分30b及び第3部分30cは、アタッチメント30のY軸プラス側の面及びY軸マイナス側の面の少なくとも一方に形成されていればよい。 The surface of the attachment 30 on the plus side of the Y-axis is formed with a first portion 30a, a second portion 30b, and a third portion 30c having different thicknesses in the minus direction of the Y-axis. The first portion 30a is a surface that comes into contact with the inner surface of the cover 35 when the cover 35 slides. The second portion 30b is a portion thicker than the first portion 30a. The third portion 30c is a portion thicker than the second portion 30b. For example, the first portion 30a, the second portion 30b, and the third portion 30c are formed in a staircase pattern. The first portion 30a, the second portion 30b, and the third portion 30c may be formed on at least one of the Y-axis plus side surface and the Y-axis minus side surface of the attachment 30.
 図11Bに示すように、カバー35がX軸マイナス方向にスライドすることで、開口35aは閉じられる。つまり、カバー35は、開状態から閉状態となる。このとき、カバー35の当接部35bは、第2部分30bと当接することで、X軸マイナス方向の移動が規制される。カバー35は、当接部35bが第2部分30bと当接した状態で、開口35aを覆うように形成される。このとき、カバー35は、X時軸プラス方向には、移動可能な状態である。つまり、当接部35bが第2部分30bと当接した状態は、カバー35を容易に開状態とすることができる状態である。カバー35が搬送部34内の部品が飛び出さないようにシャッタとして機能している状態であるとも言える。例えば、頻繁にカバー35を開閉する必要がある場合、図11A及び図11Bに示す状態が繰り返し行われる。例えば、実装ヘッド107が部品の取り出しを行わない間は、開状態から図11Bに示す状態に遷移する。 As shown in FIG. 11B, the opening 35a is closed by sliding the cover 35 in the minus direction of the X-axis. That is, the cover 35 changes from the open state to the closed state. At this time, the contact portion 35b of the cover 35 comes into contact with the second portion 30b, so that the movement in the minus direction of the X axis is restricted. The cover 35 is formed so as to cover the opening 35a in a state where the contact portion 35b is in contact with the second portion 30b. At this time, the cover 35 is in a movable state in the plus direction of the X hour axis. That is, the state in which the contact portion 35b is in contact with the second portion 30b is a state in which the cover 35 can be easily opened. It can be said that the cover 35 is in a state of functioning as a shutter so that the parts in the transport portion 34 do not pop out. For example, when the cover 35 needs to be opened and closed frequently, the states shown in FIGS. 11A and 11B are repeated. For example, while the mounting head 107 does not take out the component, the state transitions from the open state to the state shown in FIG. 11B.
 図11Cに示すように、図11Bに示す状態からさらにカバー35がX軸マイナス方向にスライドする(押し込まれる)ことで、当接部35bは、第3部分30cと当接する。このとき、カバー35と第2部分30bとが篏合するので、カバー35は、容易に移動できない状態となる。つまり、カバー35を容易に開状態とすることができない状態となる。カバー35が開口35aを覆う蓋として機能している状態であるとも言える。例えば、アタッチメント30をフィーダ本体部40から取り外すときなどに、図11Cに示す状態に遷移する。なお、図11A~図11Cに示すカバー35の状態の遷移は、第1制御装置50aにより実行される。 As shown in FIG. 11C, the cover 35 further slides (pushes in) in the minus direction of the X-axis from the state shown in FIG. 11B, so that the contact portion 35b comes into contact with the third portion 30c. At this time, since the cover 35 and the second portion 30b are in contact with each other, the cover 35 cannot be easily moved. That is, the cover 35 cannot be easily opened. It can be said that the cover 35 functions as a lid for covering the opening 35a. For example, when the attachment 30 is removed from the feeder main body 40, the state transitions to the state shown in FIG. 11C. The transition of the state of the cover 35 shown in FIGS. 11A to 11C is executed by the first control device 50a.
 図3及び図4を再び参照して、係合部36は、フィーダ本体部40に対してアタッチメント30を固定するために、アタッチメント30の下面(Z軸マイナス側の面)に形成された凹みである。係合部36は、フィーダ本体部40に設けられる爪部43に対応する位置に設けられ、当該爪部43と係合する。つまり、係合部36と爪部43とが係合することで、フィーダ本体部40に対してアタッチメント30が固定される。 With reference to FIGS. 3 and 4 again, the engaging portion 36 is a recess formed in the lower surface (Z-axis minus side surface) of the attachment 30 for fixing the attachment 30 to the feeder main body 40. be. The engaging portion 36 is provided at a position corresponding to the claw portion 43 provided in the feeder main body portion 40, and engages with the claw portion 43. That is, the attachment 30 is fixed to the feeder main body 40 by engaging the engaging portion 36 and the claw portion 43.
 凸部38は、搬送ロボット60がアタッチメント30を供給ユニット80のフィーダ本体部40に取付ける際に、ロボットアーム61により把持される部分である。凸部38は、例えば、アタッチメント30のX軸マイナス側の壁面からX軸マイナス側に突出するように設けられる。凸部38には、ロボットアーム61が凸部38を把持するときの把持位置を決める位置決め部を有していてもよい。位置決め部は、例えば、凸部38の上下面に形成された一対の凹みである。例えば、凸部38には、第1の凸部14の位置決め部14aのような位置決め部が形成されていてもよい。 The convex portion 38 is a portion gripped by the robot arm 61 when the transfer robot 60 attaches the attachment 30 to the feeder main body portion 40 of the supply unit 80. The convex portion 38 is provided, for example, so as to project from the wall surface on the minus side of the X axis of the attachment 30 toward the minus side of the X axis. The convex portion 38 may have a positioning portion that determines a gripping position when the robot arm 61 grips the convex portion 38. The positioning portion is, for example, a pair of recesses formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the convex portion 38. For example, the convex portion 38 may be formed with a positioning portion such as the positioning portion 14a of the first convex portion 14.
 RFタグT3には、当該アタッチメント30の識別情報、使用履歴、アタッチメント30に対応する部品などのタグ情報が記憶される。また、アタッチメント30にケース10が取り付けられている場合、RFタグT3には、当該ケース10の部品に関する情報が記憶されていてもよい。つまり、RFタグT2に記憶されている情報の少なくとも一部がRFタグT3に記憶されていてもよい。RFタグT3には、入庫日、管理番号等の情報が部品保管庫Wのリーダライタを介して書込まれていてもよい。なお、以下では、アタッチメント30は、例えば、部品の種類ごとに専用に設けられる、つまり部品とアタッチメント30とが紐づけられている例について説明するが、これに限定されない。また、部品の種類は、例えば、素子の種別(抵抗、コンデンサ等)、部品のサイズ(0402、0603、1005等、実寸法に限らず、規格上、データ上の寸法を含む)、部品の型番、ケース10のサイズ、部品の生産メーカなどの少なくとも1つを含む。RFタグT3は、第3のRFタグの一例である。 The RF tag T3 stores tag information such as identification information of the attachment 30, usage history, and parts corresponding to the attachment 30. Further, when the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30, the RF tag T3 may store information about the parts of the case 10. That is, at least a part of the information stored in the RF tag T2 may be stored in the RF tag T3. Information such as a warehousing date and a control number may be written in the RF tag T3 via the reader / writer of the parts storage W. In the following, the attachment 30 will be described, for example, exclusively provided for each type of component, that is, an example in which the component and the attachment 30 are associated with each other, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The types of parts include, for example, the type of element (resistor, capacitor, etc.), the size of the part (0402, 0603, 1005, etc., not limited to actual dimensions, but also standard and data dimensions), and the model number of the part. , The size of the case 10, the manufacturer of the parts, and the like. The RF tag T3 is an example of a third RF tag.
 なお、上記では、棒体33(作用部)が被装着部32に設けられ、ケース10のカバー11を開閉する例について説明したが、これに限定されない。例えば、棒体33がケース10に設けられ、当該ケース10が被装着部32に取り付けられた後、棒体33が被装着部32のカバー32aを押圧することで、カバー32aを開閉してもよい。つまり、ケース10に設けられる作用部が被装着部32のカバー32aを開閉してもよい。 In the above description, an example in which the rod body 33 (acting portion) is provided on the mounted portion 32 to open and close the cover 11 of the case 10 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, even if the rod body 33 is provided in the case 10, the case 10 is attached to the mounted portion 32, and then the rod body 33 presses the cover 32a of the mounted portion 32 to open and close the cover 32a. good. That is, the acting portion provided on the case 10 may open and close the cover 32a of the mounted portion 32.
 なお、上記では、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられ、かつ、照合された後に、棒体33によりカバー11の開閉が行われたが、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられることに連動して、ケース10のカバー11が開閉されてもよい。例えば、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられるときに、予め棒体33を被装着部32から突出させておくことで、実現可能である。 In the above, the cover 11 is opened and closed by the rod body 33 after the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 and collated, but the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 in conjunction with the case. The cover 11 of 10 may be opened and closed. For example, it can be realized by projecting the rod body 33 from the mounted portion 32 in advance when the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30.
 [1-2-3.フィーダ本体部]
 図3及び図4に示すように、フィーダ本体部40は、アタッチメント30が着脱可能に取り付けられる物体である。言い換えると、フィーダ本体部40は、被装着部32と搬送部34とが着脱可能に取り付けられる。
[1-2-3. Feeder body]
As shown in FIGS. 3 and 4, the feeder main body 40 is an object to which the attachment 30 is detachably attached. In other words, the feeder main body 40 is detachably attached to the mounted portion 32 and the transport portion 34.
 図2~図4に示すように、フィーダ本体部40は、振動発生部41と、爪部43と、凸部44と、駆動部45と、RFタグT1とを有する。フィーダ本体部40は、振動発生部41、爪部43及びRFタグT1などを収容する収容体であり、例えば、箱状である。 As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the feeder main body 40 has a vibration generating portion 41, a claw portion 43, a convex portion 44, a driving portion 45, and an RF tag T1. The feeder main body 40 is an accommodating body that accommodates the vibration generating portion 41, the claw portion 43, the RF tag T1, and the like, and is, for example, a box shape.
 振動発生部41は、アタッチメント30を振動させることにより、部品を開口35aまで搬送する。振動発生部41は、例えば、X軸方向に沿ってアタッチメント30を振動させるが、これに限定されず、部品を開口35aまで搬送することができればいかなる振動条件であってもよい。また、振動発生部41は、振動条件によりケース10からアタッチメント30に供給される部品の供給量を制御することができる。振動条件は、部品の供給量に応じて決定されてもよい。振動発生部41は、例えば、アクチュエータ(振動子)により実現される。 The vibration generating unit 41 vibrates the attachment 30 to convey the parts to the opening 35a. The vibration generating unit 41 vibrates the attachment 30 along the X-axis direction, for example, but the attachment 30 is not limited to this, and any vibration condition may be used as long as the component can be conveyed to the opening 35a. Further, the vibration generating unit 41 can control the supply amount of the parts supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30 depending on the vibration conditions. The vibration conditions may be determined according to the supply amount of the parts. The vibration generating unit 41 is realized by, for example, an actuator (oscillator).
 爪部43は、アタッチメント30をフィーダ本体部40に固定するために、アタッチメント30の下面が接触する位置に設けられる凸部である。爪部43は、アタッチメント30の係合部36と係合することで、アタッチメント30をフィーダ本体部40に固定する。爪部43は、フィーダ本体部40に収容される第3の位置と、フィーダ本体部40から突出する第4の位置との間で移動可能である。つまり、爪部43は、Z軸方向に移動可能であってもよい。図4では、爪部37は、第4の位置に固定されている。爪部43の第3の位置と第4の位置との移動は、例えば、フィーダ本体部40が有する駆動部(図示しない)により行われてもよい。 The claw portion 43 is a convex portion provided at a position where the lower surface of the attachment 30 comes into contact with the attachment 30 in order to fix the attachment 30 to the feeder main body portion 40. The claw portion 43 engages with the engaging portion 36 of the attachment 30 to fix the attachment 30 to the feeder main body portion 40. The claw portion 43 is movable between a third position housed in the feeder main body 40 and a fourth position protruding from the feeder main body 40. That is, the claw portion 43 may be movable in the Z-axis direction. In FIG. 4, the claw portion 37 is fixed at the fourth position. The movement of the claw portion 43 from the third position to the fourth position may be performed by, for example, a drive portion (not shown) included in the feeder main body portion 40.
 凸部44は、搬送ロボット60がフィーダ本体部40を供給ユニット80の台車70に取付ける際に、ロボットアーム61により把持される部分である。凸部44は、例えば、フィーダ本体部40のX軸マイナス側の壁面からX軸マイナス側に突出するように設けられる。凸部44には、ロボットアーム61が凸部44を把持するときの把持位置を決める位置決め部を有していてもよい。位置決め部は、例えば、凸部44の上下面に形成された一対の凹みである。つまり、凸部44には、第1の凸部14の位置決め部14aのような位置決め部が形成されていてもよい。 The convex portion 44 is a portion gripped by the robot arm 61 when the transfer robot 60 attaches the feeder main body portion 40 to the carriage 70 of the supply unit 80. The convex portion 44 is provided, for example, so as to project from the wall surface on the negative side of the X axis of the feeder main body 40 to the negative side of the X axis. The convex portion 44 may have a positioning portion that determines a gripping position when the robot arm 61 grips the convex portion 44. The positioning portion is, for example, a pair of recesses formed on the upper and lower surfaces of the convex portion 44. That is, the convex portion 44 may be formed with a positioning portion such as the positioning portion 14a of the first convex portion 14.
 駆動部45は、第1制御装置50aの制御により、アタッチメント30のケース10が装着される被装着部32に設けられる棒体33をX軸方向に沿って移動させる。駆動部45は、棒体33を被装着部32に対して出し入れするとも言える。駆動部45は、ケース10が被装着部32に装着された状態で、棒体33をカバー11に物理的に作用させることで、カバー11を閉状態から開状態とする。また、駆動部45は、ケース10が被装着部32に装着された状態で、棒体33をカバー11に物理的に作用させることを止めることで、例えば、棒体33をカバー11と接触している状態から接触していない状態に遷移させることで、カバー11を開状態から閉状態とする。駆動部45は、例えば、アクチュエータにより実現される。 The drive unit 45 moves the rod body 33 provided on the mounted portion 32 to which the case 10 of the attachment 30 is mounted along the X-axis direction under the control of the first control device 50a. It can be said that the drive unit 45 moves the rod body 33 in and out of the mounted unit 32. The drive unit 45 changes the cover 11 from the closed state to the open state by physically acting the rod body 33 on the cover 11 while the case 10 is mounted on the mounted portion 32. Further, the drive unit 45 stops the rod body 33 from physically acting on the cover 11 while the case 10 is mounted on the mounted portion 32, so that the rod body 33 comes into contact with the cover 11, for example. The cover 11 is changed from the open state to the closed state by transitioning from the state of being in contact to the state of not being in contact. The drive unit 45 is realized by, for example, an actuator.
 このように、フィーダ本体部40に設けられる駆動部45によってカバー11に物理的に作用する棒体33が駆動される。また、上記のように、例えば、ケース本体部12は、カバー11の一端部11aをケース10の外方側から覆い、棒体33が挿通可能な貫通孔17aが形成されたカバー17を有する。つまり、本実施の形態に係る実装システム1では、フィーダ20の外部からカバー11を閉開するための操作ができないようになっており、作業者あるいは搬送ロボット60の誤操作によるカバー11の閉開を抑制できる。例えば、本実施の形態に係る実装システム1では、ケース10及びアタッチメント30がフィーダ本体部40に取り付けられないとカバー11を閉開することができないようになっており、作業者あるいは搬送ロボット60の誤操作によるカバー11の閉開を抑制できる。 In this way, the rod body 33 that physically acts on the cover 11 is driven by the drive unit 45 provided in the feeder main body 40. Further, as described above, for example, the case main body portion 12 has a cover 17 in which one end portion 11a of the cover 11 is covered from the outer side of the case 10 and a through hole 17a through which the rod body 33 can be inserted is formed. That is, in the mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment, the operation for closing and opening the cover 11 cannot be performed from the outside of the feeder 20, and the cover 11 can be opened and closed by an erroneous operation of the operator or the transfer robot 60. Can be suppressed. For example, in the mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment, the cover 11 cannot be opened or closed unless the case 10 and the attachment 30 are attached to the feeder main body 40, and the operator or the transfer robot 60 can be used. It is possible to suppress the opening and closing of the cover 11 due to an erroneous operation.
 RFタグT1には、当該フィーダ本体部40の識別情報、使用履歴などの情報が記憶される。RFタグT1には、入庫日、管理番号等の情報が部品保管庫Wのリーダライタを介して書込まれていてもよい。なお、RFタグT1は、フィーダ本体部40の内部に内蔵されていてもよい。RFタグT1は、第1のRFタグの一例である。 The RF tag T1 stores information such as identification information and usage history of the feeder main body 40. Information such as a warehousing date and a control number may be written in the RF tag T1 via a reader / writer of the parts storage W. The RF tag T1 may be built in the feeder main body 40. The RF tag T1 is an example of the first RF tag.
 [1-2-4.制御装置]
 図1A及び図1Bに示すように、統合制御装置50は、第1制御装置50a及び第2制御装置50bに対して指示を送る。第1制御装置50aは、実装システム1の各構成要素を制御する。統合制御装置50は、制御部51と、記憶部52とを有する。
[1-2-4. Control device]
As shown in FIGS. 1A and 1B, the integrated control device 50 sends an instruction to the first control device 50a and the second control device 50b. The first control device 50a controls each component of the mounting system 1. The integrated control device 50 has a control unit 51 and a storage unit 52.
 制御部51は、第1制御装置50a及び第2制御装置50bに対して指示を送る。制御部51は、例えば、第1制御装置50aに対して、実装ライン90における生産に関する指示を出力する。また、制御部51は、例えば、第2制御装置50bに対して、部品の補給に関する指示(例えば、補給要求)を出力する。また、制御部51は、読取装置130及びリーダライタRWから取得したタグ情報の照合、各種判定処理などを行う。 The control unit 51 sends an instruction to the first control device 50a and the second control device 50b. The control unit 51 outputs, for example, an instruction regarding production on the mounting line 90 to the first control device 50a. Further, the control unit 51 outputs, for example, an instruction (for example, a supply request) regarding the supply of parts to the second control device 50b. Further, the control unit 51 collates the tag information acquired from the reader 130 and the reader / writer RW, performs various determination processes, and the like.
 第1制御装置50aは、振動発生部41、駆動部45、実装ヘッド107、電源部111、読取装置130及び部品検出部141と通信可能に接続され、統合制御装置50からの指示に基づいて各構成要素を制御する。第2制御装置50bは、搬送ロボット60と通信可能に接続され、統合制御装置50からの指示に基づいて搬送ロボット60を制御する。第1制御装置50aは、駆動部45を制御することで、棒体33を出し入れさせる。第1制御装置50aは、駆動部45を制御して、棒体33をX軸マイナス側に押し出すことで、アタッチメント30に取り付けられたケース10のカバー11を開状態にする。また、第1制御装置50aは、駆動部45を制御して、棒体33をX軸プラス側に戻し、アタッチメント30に取り付けられたケース10のカバー11を閉状態にする。 The first control device 50a is communicably connected to the vibration generation unit 41, the drive unit 45, the mounting head 107, the power supply unit 111, the reading device 130, and the component detection unit 141, and each is based on an instruction from the integrated control device 50. Control the components. The second control device 50b is communicably connected to the transfer robot 60 and controls the transfer robot 60 based on an instruction from the integrated control device 50. The first control device 50a controls the drive unit 45 to move the rod body 33 in and out. The first control device 50a controls the drive unit 45 and pushes the rod body 33 toward the minus side of the X-axis to open the cover 11 of the case 10 attached to the attachment 30. Further, the first control device 50a controls the drive unit 45 to return the rod body 33 to the X-axis plus side, and closes the cover 11 of the case 10 attached to the attachment 30.
 また、第1制御装置50aは、部品を実装ヘッド107が取り出し可能な位置まで搬送するときに振動発生部41を制御して、アタッチメント30を振動させる。この振動は、例えばケース10にも伝わる。これにより、ケース10からアタッチメント30に部品が供給され、当該部品が振動により開口35aまで搬送される。第1制御装置50aは、ケース10の開口15からアタッチメント30に供給された部品を、振動発生部41の振動により、当該アタッチメント30の搬送部34を介して開口35aまで搬送させるとも言える。また、第1制御装置50aは、電源部111を制御して、必要に応じて振動発生部41及び駆動部45などに電力を供給させてもよい。 Further, the first control device 50a controls the vibration generating unit 41 when the component is conveyed to a position where the mounting head 107 can be taken out, and vibrates the attachment 30. This vibration is also transmitted to, for example, the case 10. As a result, parts are supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30, and the parts are conveyed to the opening 35a by vibration. It can be said that the first control device 50a conveys the parts supplied from the opening 15 of the case 10 to the attachment 30 to the opening 35a via the conveying portion 34 of the attachment 30 by the vibration of the vibration generating portion 41. Further, the first control device 50a may control the power supply unit 111 to supply electric power to the vibration generating unit 41, the driving unit 45, and the like as needed.
 また、制御部51は、台車70に取り付けられた読取装置130を制御して、当該台車70に取り付けられたケース10、アタッチメント30及びフィーダ本体部40のそれぞれからRFタグT1~T4に記憶されているタグ情報を取得することで、台車70に取り付けられたケース10、アタッチメント30及びフィーダ本体部40に誤りがないか確認する。また、制御部51は、例えば、準備エリアA2で準備された供給ユニット80に対して上記の確認を行うことで、事前に配置誤り等を確認することができる。また、制御部51は、台車70の待機エリアA21(空きスペース)に保管されたロール体ケース120のRFタグT4からもタグ情報を取得することが可能である。なお、台車70の空きスペースに保管される部品はロール体ケース120であることに限定されない。 Further, the control unit 51 controls the reading device 130 attached to the trolley 70, and is stored in the RF tags T1 to T4 from each of the case 10, the attachment 30, and the feeder main body 40 attached to the trolley 70. By acquiring the tag information, it is confirmed whether the case 10, the attachment 30, and the feeder main body 40 attached to the trolley 70 are correct. Further, the control unit 51 can confirm the arrangement error or the like in advance by performing the above confirmation on the supply unit 80 prepared in the preparation area A2, for example. Further, the control unit 51 can also acquire tag information from the RF tag T4 of the roll body case 120 stored in the standby area A21 (empty space) of the carriage 70. The parts stored in the empty space of the carriage 70 are not limited to the roll body case 120.
 また、第1制御装置50aは、実装ヘッド107を制御して、開口35aまで搬送された部品を取り出させて、対象物に実装させる。このとき、第1制御装置50aは、実装ヘッド107により対象物に実装した部品の数をカウントしてもよい。 Further, the first control device 50a controls the mounting head 107 to take out the parts conveyed to the opening 35a and mount them on the object. At this time, the first control device 50a may count the number of parts mounted on the object by the mounting head 107.
 RFタグT1は、当該フィーダ本体部40の使用履歴、識別情報などのタグ情報が記憶される。 The RF tag T1 stores tag information such as usage history and identification information of the feeder main body 40.
 RFタグT4は、RFタグT4が取り付けられたロール体ケース120に収納されている部品に関する情報を含むタグ情報を記憶する。ロール体ケース120は、例えば、キャリアテープがロール状に巻かれてなるテープロール体を収容する。 The RF tag T4 stores tag information including information about parts housed in the roll body case 120 to which the RF tag T4 is attached. The roll body case 120 accommodates, for example, a tape roll body in which a carrier tape is rolled into a roll shape.
 また、統合制御装置50は、例えば、生産データに基づいて、次の生産で用いる供給ユニット80を事前に準備するよう第2制御装置50bに指示してもよい。第2制御装置50bは、例えば、生産データに基づいて、次の生産で用いる部品に関する情報を取得し、取得した部品を収容するケース10、及び、当該ケース10に対応するアタッチメント30を部品保管庫Wから準備エリアA2に搬送させるよう搬送ロボット60を制御する。このとき、第2制御装置50bは、次の生産で用いる部品を収容するケース10が複数ある場合、例えば、次の生産に用いる部品数より在庫が多いケース10を搬送ロボット60により搬送させてもよい。第2制御装置50bが複数のケース10の各々から、リーダライタRWを介して部品に関する情報を取得することで、次の生産に用いる部品数より在庫が多いケース10を特定することは可能である。 Further, the integrated control device 50 may instruct the second control device 50b to prepare in advance the supply unit 80 to be used in the next production, for example, based on the production data. The second control device 50b acquires, for example, information about the parts used in the next production based on the production data, and stores the case 10 for accommodating the acquired parts and the attachment 30 corresponding to the case 10 in the parts storage. The transfer robot 60 is controlled so as to transfer from W to the preparation area A2. At this time, when the second control device 50b has a plurality of cases 10 accommodating parts used in the next production, for example, even if the case 10 having a larger inventory than the number of parts used in the next production is conveyed by the transfer robot 60. good. By acquiring information about parts from each of the plurality of cases 10 by the second control device 50b via the reader / writer RW, it is possible to identify the case 10 in which the inventory is larger than the number of parts used for the next production. ..
 第2制御装置50bは、次の生産で使用する部品を収容するケース10単体を当該ケース10に対応するアタッチメント30に取り付け、ケース10が取り付けられたアタッチメント30を搬送ロボット60に搬送させてもよいし、既にケース10が取り付けられたアタッチメント30が保管されている場合、当該アタッチメント30を搬送ロボット60に搬送させてもよい。既にケース10が取り付けられたアタッチメント30が保管されている場合とは、過去の生産で使用したケース10の残数が所定数以上あり、実装ライン90からケース10が取り付けられたアタッチメント30がその状態のまま、部品保管庫Wに保管されている場合などである。 The second control device 50b may attach a single case 10 accommodating parts to be used in the next production to the attachment 30 corresponding to the case 10, and convey the attachment 30 to which the case 10 is attached to the transfer robot 60. If the attachment 30 to which the case 10 is already attached is stored, the attachment 30 may be conveyed to the transfer robot 60. When the attachment 30 to which the case 10 is already attached is stored, the remaining number of cases 10 used in the past production is a predetermined number or more, and the attachment 30 to which the case 10 is attached from the mounting line 90 is in that state. This is the case when the parts are stored in the parts storage W as they are.
 そして、第2制御装置50bは、搬送ロボット60により搬送したケース10及びアタッチメント30を、予め台車70に配置されたフィーダ本体部40に取り付ける。具体的には、第2制御装置50bは、フィーダ本体部40にアタッチメント30を取り付ける。 Then, the second control device 50b attaches the case 10 and the attachment 30 conveyed by the transfer robot 60 to the feeder main body 40 previously arranged on the carriage 70. Specifically, the second control device 50b attaches the attachment 30 to the feeder main body 40.
 記憶部52は、制御部51が上記の制御を行うための各種プログラム、実装基板を生産するための生産データ、取得したRFタグTの情報、部品とアタッチメント30との対応関係を示す情報などを記憶する。記憶部52は、例えば、半導体メモリにより実現されるが、これに限定されない。生産データは、例えば、使用する部品の種類、数、台車70でのケース10の配置などが対応付けられたテーブルである。 The storage unit 52 stores various programs for the control unit 51 to perform the above control, production data for producing the mounting board, acquired RF tag T information, information indicating the correspondence between the component and the attachment 30, and the like. Remember. The storage unit 52 is realized by, for example, a semiconductor memory, but is not limited thereto. The production data is, for example, a table in which the type and number of parts to be used, the arrangement of the case 10 on the trolley 70, and the like are associated with each other.
 [1-2-5.台車]
 台車70は、部品実装装置100の本体に対して着脱可能に構成されている。部品実装装置100の本体は、例えば、部品実装装置100のうちの台車70を除く部分である。台車70は、フィーダ20を保持する保持部71と、保持部71を支持する台車本体部と、読取装置130とを有する。台車70は、例えば、複数の保持部71を有し、複数の保持部71は台車本体部の上にY軸方向に沿って配列されている。この場合、複数の保持部71のそれぞれはフィーダ20を保持する。そして、読取装置130は、複数の保持部71それぞれに設けられる。なお、保持部71は、例えば、フィーダスロットとも呼ばれる。また、台車70は、フィーダ配置部の一例である。
[1-2-5. Cart]
The dolly 70 is configured to be removable from the main body of the component mounting device 100. The main body of the component mounting device 100 is, for example, a part of the component mounting device 100 excluding the carriage 70. The dolly 70 has a holding portion 71 for holding the feeder 20, a dolly main body portion for supporting the holding portion 71, and a reading device 130. The carriage 70 has, for example, a plurality of holding portions 71, and the plurality of holding portions 71 are arranged on the carriage main body portion along the Y-axis direction. In this case, each of the plurality of holding portions 71 holds the feeder 20. The reading device 130 is provided in each of the plurality of holding portions 71. The holding portion 71 is also referred to as, for example, a feeder slot. Further, the dolly 70 is an example of a feeder arrangement portion.
 読取装置130は、当該読取装置130が配置されている保持部71に保持されているフィーダ20及び当該フィーダ20に固定されているケース10のタグ情報を読み取る。具体的には、読取装置130は、ケース10に貼り付けられているRFタグT2、アタッチメント30に貼り付けられているRFタグT3、及び、フィーダ本体部40に貼り付けられているRFタグT1のそれぞれから、タグ情報を読み取る。また、読取装置130は、さらに台車70の待機エリアA21に物体がある場合、当該物体に貼り付けられたRFタグ(第4のRFタグの一例)からも当該物体に関するタグ情報を読み取ってもよい。図3の例では、待機エリアA21にロール体ケース120が保管されており、当該ロール体ケース120にはRFタグT4が貼り付けられている。読取装置130は、RFタグT4からもタグ情報を読み取ってもよい。RFタグT4は、第4のRFタグの一例である。 The reading device 130 reads the tag information of the feeder 20 held in the holding unit 71 in which the reading device 130 is arranged and the case 10 fixed to the feeder 20. Specifically, the reading device 130 has an RF tag T2 attached to the case 10, an RF tag T3 attached to the attachment 30, and an RF tag T1 attached to the feeder main body 40. Read the tag information from each. Further, when the object is in the standby area A21 of the carriage 70, the reading device 130 may read the tag information about the object from the RF tag (an example of the fourth RF tag) attached to the object. .. In the example of FIG. 3, the roll body case 120 is stored in the standby area A21, and the RF tag T4 is attached to the roll body case 120. The reading device 130 may also read the tag information from the RF tag T4. The RF tag T4 is an example of a fourth RF tag.
 なお、待機エリアA21に待機する物体は、実装システム1の生産に関係する物体であり、例えば、フィーダ、ケース又はテープフィーダなどであってもよい。テープフィーダは、部品を収納した部品テープからその部品を供給する。また、物体は、トレイフィーダ、スティックフィー、バルクフィーダなどであってもよい。トレイフィーダは、部品を収納したトレイからその部品を供給する。スティックフィーダは、部品を収納したスティックケースからその部品を供給する。 The object waiting in the standby area A21 is an object related to the production of the mounting system 1, and may be, for example, a feeder, a case, or a tape feeder. The tape feeder supplies the parts from the parts tape containing the parts. Further, the object may be a tray feeder, a stick fee, a bulk feeder, or the like. The tray feeder supplies the parts from the tray containing the parts. The stick feeder supplies the parts from the stick case containing the parts.
 読取装置130が読み取ったタグ情報は、第1制御装置50aを介して統合制御装置50に出力される。 The tag information read by the reading device 130 is output to the integrated control device 50 via the first control device 50a.
 ここで、読取装置130が各RFタグからタグ情報を読み取るためのアンテナ及びRFタグの配置について、図12を参照しながら説明する。図12は、本実施の形態に係るアンテナ及びRFタグの配置を説明するための模式部分断面図である。 Here, the arrangement of the antenna and the RF tag for the reading device 130 to read the tag information from each RF tag will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view for explaining the arrangement of the antenna and the RF tag according to the present embodiment.
 図12に示すように、読取装置130は、読取部131と、切替部132と、アンテナa1~a7とを有する。 As shown in FIG. 12, the reading device 130 has a reading unit 131, a switching unit 132, and antennas a1 to a7.
 読取部131は、アンテナa1~a7を介して各RFタグからタグ情報を読み出す。読取部131は、切替部132により選択されたアンテナを介して当該アンテナに対応するRFタグからタグ情報を読み出す。読取部131は、例えば、各RFタグからタグ情報を読み出すリーダライタにより実現される。 The reading unit 131 reads tag information from each RF tag via the antennas a1 to a7. The reading unit 131 reads tag information from the RF tag corresponding to the antenna via the antenna selected by the switching unit 132. The reading unit 131 is realized by, for example, a reader / writer that reads tag information from each RF tag.
 切替部132は、読取部131がタグ情報を読み取るRFタグを切り替えるために、読取部131と接続されるアンテナa1~a7を選択する。切替部132は、読取対象のRFタグからタグ情報を読み取るために、当該RFタグからタグ情報を読み取り可能なアンテナを選択するとも言える。 The switching unit 132 selects antennas a1 to a7 connected to the reading unit 131 in order to switch the RF tag on which the reading unit 131 reads the tag information. It can also be said that the switching unit 132 selects an antenna that can read the tag information from the RF tag in order to read the tag information from the RF tag to be read.
 アンテナa1は、台車70に設けられ、RFタグT1に対して信号を送受信可能なアンテナである。アンテナa1は、RFタグT1の近傍において、RFタグT1と対向するように配置される。アンテナa1と切替部132とは、例えば、ケーブルC1により接続される。アンテナa1は、第1のアンテナの一例である。 Antenna a1 is an antenna provided on the carriage 70 and capable of transmitting and receiving signals to the RF tag T1. The antenna a1 is arranged in the vicinity of the RF tag T1 so as to face the RF tag T1. The antenna a1 and the switching unit 132 are connected by, for example, a cable C1. The antenna a1 is an example of the first antenna.
 アンテナa2は、台車70に設けられ、RFタグT2に対して信号を送受信可能なアンテナである。アンテナa2と切替部132とは、例えば、ケーブルC2により接続される。アンテナa1は、第2のアンテナの一例である。 The antenna a2 is an antenna provided on the carriage 70 and capable of transmitting and receiving signals to and from the RF tag T2. The antenna a2 and the switching unit 132 are connected by, for example, a cable C2. The antenna a1 is an example of the second antenna.
 アンテナa3は、フィーダ20に設けられ、RFタグT2と対向するように配置される。具体的には、アンテナa3は、フィーダ本体部40に配置される。より具体的には、アンテナa3は、フィーダ本体部40のアタッチメント30側の面に配置される。つまり、アンテナa3は、RFタグT2の近傍に配置される。アンテナa3は、第3のアンテナの一例である。 The antenna a3 is provided on the feeder 20 and is arranged so as to face the RF tag T2. Specifically, the antenna a3 is arranged in the feeder main body 40. More specifically, the antenna a3 is arranged on the surface of the feeder main body 40 on the attachment 30 side. That is, the antenna a3 is arranged in the vicinity of the RF tag T2. The antenna a3 is an example of the third antenna.
 なお、アンテナa3は、RFタグT3に対して、RFタグT2に記憶されているタグ情報を含む信号を送信してもよい。つまり、アンテナa3は、RFタグT2及びRFタグT3のそれぞれに対して信号を送受信可能であってもよい。 Note that the antenna a3 may transmit a signal including the tag information stored in the RF tag T2 to the RF tag T3. That is, the antenna a3 may be capable of transmitting and receiving signals to and from each of the RF tag T2 and the RF tag T3.
 アンテナa4は、フィーダ20に設けられ、アンテナa2と対向するように配置される。具体的には、アンテナa4は、フィーダ本体部40に配置される。より具体的には、アンテナa4は、フィーダ本体部40のアタッチメント30とは反対側の面に配置される。アンテナa4は、アンテナa2の近傍において、アンテナa2と対向して配置される。アンテナa4は、第4のアンテナの一例である。また、アンテナa3とアンテナa4とは、例えば、ケーブルC3により接続される。ケーブルC3は、フィーダ本体部40に収容される。 The antenna a4 is provided on the feeder 20 and is arranged so as to face the antenna a2. Specifically, the antenna a4 is arranged in the feeder main body 40. More specifically, the antenna a4 is arranged on the surface of the feeder main body 40 opposite to the attachment 30. The antenna a4 is arranged in the vicinity of the antenna a2 so as to face the antenna a2. The antenna a4 is an example of the fourth antenna. Further, the antenna a3 and the antenna a4 are connected by, for example, a cable C3. The cable C3 is housed in the feeder main body 40.
 アンテナa4は、アンテナa2と対向して配置されることで、結合型アンテナを構成する。つまり、アンテナa4とアンテナa2とは、電磁結合するように配置される。アンテナa4とアンテナa2との間において、金属等の電磁波の伝播を阻害する物体は配置されない。例えば、アンテナa4とアンテナa2との間には、空間が存在していてもよいし、空間が存在していなくてもよい。 The antenna a4 is arranged so as to face the antenna a2 to form a coupled antenna. That is, the antenna a4 and the antenna a2 are arranged so as to be electromagnetically coupled. An object that obstructs the propagation of electromagnetic waves, such as metal, is not placed between the antenna a4 and the antenna a2. For example, a space may or may not exist between the antenna a4 and the antenna a2.
 これにより、アンテナa2は、アンテナa4、ケーブルC3及びアンテナa3を介して、RFタグT2に対して信号を送受信可能である。なお、アンテナa4、ケーブルC3及びアンテナa3は、アンテナa2の信号を伝送する伝送部の一例である。 As a result, the antenna a2 can send and receive signals to and from the RF tag T2 via the antenna a4, the cable C3, and the antenna a3. The antenna a4, the cable C3, and the antenna a3 are examples of a transmission unit that transmits the signal of the antenna a2.
 アンテナa5は、台車70に設けられ、RFタグT3に対して信号を送受信可能なアンテナである。アンテナa5と切替部132とは、例えば、ケーブルC4により接続される。アンテナa5は、第5のアンテナの一例である。 The antenna a5 is provided on the carriage 70 and is an antenna capable of transmitting and receiving signals to the RF tag T3. The antenna a5 and the switching unit 132 are connected by, for example, a cable C4. The antenna a5 is an example of the fifth antenna.
 アンテナa6は、フィーダ20に設けられ、RFタグT3と対向するように配置される。具体的には、アンテナa6は、フィーダ本体部40に配置される。より具体的には、アンテナa6は、フィーダ本体部40のアタッチメント30側の面に配置される。つまり、アンテナa6は、RFタグT3の近傍に配置される。本実施の形態では、アンテナa6とアンテナa3とは、平面視において、重ならない位置に配置されるが、アンテナa6とアンテナa3とは、平面視において、少なくとも一部が重なるように配置されてもよい。 The antenna a6 is provided on the feeder 20 and is arranged so as to face the RF tag T3. Specifically, the antenna a6 is arranged in the feeder main body 40. More specifically, the antenna a6 is arranged on the surface of the feeder main body 40 on the attachment 30 side. That is, the antenna a6 is arranged in the vicinity of the RF tag T3. In the present embodiment, the antenna a6 and the antenna a3 are arranged at positions where they do not overlap in a plan view, but the antenna a6 and the antenna a3 may be arranged so that at least a part of them overlap in a plan view. good.
 アンテナa7は、フィーダ20に設けられ、アンテナa5と対向するように配置される。具体的には、アンテナa7は、フィーダ本体部40に配置される。より具体的には、アンテナa7は、フィーダ本体部40のアタッチメント30とは反対側の面に配置される。アンテナa7は、アンテナa5の近傍に配置される。アンテナa6とアンテナa7とは、例えば、ケーブルC5により接続される。ケーブルC5は、フィーダ本体部40に収容される。 The antenna a7 is provided on the feeder 20 and is arranged so as to face the antenna a5. Specifically, the antenna a7 is arranged on the feeder main body 40. More specifically, the antenna a7 is arranged on the surface of the feeder main body 40 opposite to the attachment 30. The antenna a7 is arranged in the vicinity of the antenna a5. The antenna a6 and the antenna a7 are connected by, for example, a cable C5. The cable C5 is housed in the feeder main body 40.
 アンテナa7は、アンテナa5と対向して配置されることで、結合型アンテナを構成する。これにより、アンテナa5は、アンテナa7、ケーブルC5及びアンテナa6を介して、RFタグT3に対して信号を送受信可能である。なお、アンテナa7、ケーブルC5及びアンテナa6は、アンテナa5の信号を伝送する伝送部の一例である。 The antenna a7 is arranged so as to face the antenna a5 to form a coupled antenna. As a result, the antenna a5 can transmit and receive signals to and from the RF tag T3 via the antenna a7, the cable C5, and the antenna a6. The antenna a7, the cable C5, and the antenna a6 are examples of a transmission unit that transmits the signal of the antenna a5.
 上記のように、台車70に配置されるアンテナと、フィーダ本体部40に配置されるアンテナとは、結合型アンテナを構成する。また、フィーダ本体部40内のアンテナは、ケーブルを用いて接続される。なお、フィーダ本体部40内の2つのアンテナを電磁結合可能に配置することができれば、接続にケーブルを用いなくてもよい。 As described above, the antenna arranged on the carriage 70 and the antenna arranged on the feeder main body 40 form a coupled antenna. Further, the antenna in the feeder main body 40 is connected by using a cable. If the two antennas in the feeder main body 40 can be arranged so as to be electromagnetically coupled, it is not necessary to use a cable for connection.
 ケーブルC1~C5は、例えば、同軸ケーブルであるが、これに限定されない。また、ケース10及びアタッチメント30には、例えば、ケーブル及びアンテナは配置されない。 Cables C1 to C5 are, for example, coaxial cables, but are not limited thereto. Further, for example, cables and antennas are not arranged in the case 10 and the attachment 30.
 なお、ケース10に配置されるRFタグT2とアタッチメント30に配置されるRFタグT3とは、平面視において、少なくとも一部が重ならないように配置されるとよい。RFタグT2とRFタグT3とは、平面視において、例えば、フィーダ20の長手方向において少なくとも一部が重ならないように配置されるとよい。本実施の形態では、RFタグT2とRFタグT3とは、平面視において、互いに重ならない位置に配置される。 It is preferable that the RF tag T2 arranged in the case 10 and the RF tag T3 arranged in the attachment 30 are arranged so that at least a part thereof does not overlap in a plan view. The RF tag T2 and the RF tag T3 may be arranged so that at least a part of the RF tag T2 and the RF tag T3 do not overlap in the plan view, for example, in the longitudinal direction of the feeder 20. In the present embodiment, the RF tag T2 and the RF tag T3 are arranged at positions that do not overlap each other in a plan view.
 これにより、RFタグT2とRFタグT3とが重なることで、RFタグT2のタグ情報が読み取りにくくなることを抑制することができる。なお、2つのRFタグが重なる場合であっても、当該2つのRFタグの間に少なくとも1つもアンテナが配置される場合、当該2つのRFタグは、重なっていてもよい。本実施の形態では、平面視において、RFタグT1とRFタグT2とは重なっているが、RFタグT1とRFタグT2との間にアンテナa3が配置されるので、読み取りに関しては問題ない。 As a result, it is possible to prevent the tag information of the RF tag T2 from becoming difficult to read due to the overlap of the RF tag T2 and the RF tag T3. Even when two RF tags overlap, the two RF tags may overlap if at least one antenna is arranged between the two RF tags. In the present embodiment, the RF tag T1 and the RF tag T2 overlap each other in a plan view, but since the antenna a3 is arranged between the RF tag T1 and the RF tag T2, there is no problem in reading.
 なお、読取装置130は、待機エリアA21にロール体ケース120などの物体が保管されている場合、当該物体に貼り付けられているRFタグT4に対して信号を送受信可能なアンテナ(図示しない)を有していてもよい。当該アンテナは、台車70に設けられ、RFタグT4の近傍において、当該アンテナと対向するように配置される。当該アンテナは、第6のアンテナの一例である。 When an object such as a roll case 120 is stored in the standby area A21, the reading device 130 provides an antenna (not shown) capable of transmitting and receiving signals to the RF tag T4 attached to the object. You may have. The antenna is provided on the carriage 70 and is arranged so as to face the antenna in the vicinity of the RF tag T4. The antenna is an example of the sixth antenna.
 [1-2-6.センサ及び部品検出部]
 センサ140は、ケース10からアタッチメント30に供給された部品を非接触で検出する。センサ140は、部品を非接触で検出することができれば、既存のいかなるセンサであってもよい。センサ140は、例えば、発光部と受光部とを有する光学式センサであってもよい。センサ140は、光学式センサである場合、部品検出部141に受光部の受光量に応じた出力を行う。センサ140は、例えば、被装着部32の内部であって、開口32b付近に設けられるがこれに限定されず、ケース10の開口15付近に設けられてもよい。
[1-2-6. Sensor and component detector]
The sensor 140 detects the parts supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30 in a non-contact manner. The sensor 140 may be any existing sensor as long as it can detect the component in a non-contact manner. The sensor 140 may be, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit. In the case of an optical sensor, the sensor 140 outputs to the component detection unit 141 according to the amount of light received by the light receiving unit. The sensor 140 is provided, for example, inside the mounted portion 32, in the vicinity of the opening 32b, but is not limited to this, and may be provided in the vicinity of the opening 15 of the case 10.
 部品検出部141は、センサ140の出力を受けて部品有無を検出する。部品検出部141は、センサ140の出力を受けて、ケース10からアタッチメント30に部品が供給されたか否かを検出するとも言える。また、部品検出部141は、ケース10からアタッチメント30に供給された部品の数を検出してもよいし、ケース10からアタッチメント30に部品が供給されているか否かを検出してもよい。部品検出部141は、例えば、部品実装装置100に設けられる。 The component detection unit 141 receives the output of the sensor 140 and detects the presence or absence of components. It can be said that the component detection unit 141 receives the output of the sensor 140 and detects whether or not the component is supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30. Further, the component detection unit 141 may detect the number of components supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30, or may detect whether or not the components are supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30. The component detection unit 141 is provided in, for example, the component mounting device 100.
 [1-3.実装システムの動作]
 次に、上記のような実装システム1の動作について、図13~図17を参照しながら説明する。まずは、部品実装装置100に取り付けられた台車70のケース10を交換する動作について、図13及び図14を参照しながら説明する。図13は、本実施の形態に係る実装システム1のケース10を交換する動作を示すフローチャートである。なお、図13に示すフローチャートは、生産中(基板103に部品を実装中)に行われる。つまり、図13に示すフローチャートは、実装ヘッド107によりフィーダ20内の部品を保持して基板103に実装する実装工程において、基板103に対する部品の実装が時間的に連続して行われている間に実行される。つまり、以下に示す動作は、実装工程と並行して実行される。
[1-3. Implementation system operation]
Next, the operation of the mounting system 1 as described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 17. First, the operation of exchanging the case 10 of the carriage 70 attached to the component mounting device 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an operation of exchanging the case 10 of the mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment. The flowchart shown in FIG. 13 is performed during production (parts are being mounted on the substrate 103). That is, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 13, in the mounting process in which the parts in the feeder 20 are held by the mounting head 107 and mounted on the board 103, the parts are mounted on the board 103 continuously in time. Will be executed. That is, the following operations are executed in parallel with the mounting process.
 図13に示すように、第1制御装置50aは、フィーダ20にケース10内の部品を供給させる(S101)。具体的には、第1制御装置50aは、振動発生部41を振動させることにより当該振動に応じた供給量の部品をフィーダ20(本実施の形態では、アタッチメント30)に供給させる。 As shown in FIG. 13, the first control device 50a causes the feeder 20 to supply the parts in the case 10 (S101). Specifically, the first control device 50a vibrates the vibration generating unit 41 to supply parts having a supply amount corresponding to the vibration to the feeder 20 (attachment 30 in the present embodiment).
 次に、第1制御装置50aは、ケース10内の部品の残数を取得する(S102)。第1制御装置50aは、例えば、ケース10がアタッチメント30に取り付けられたときに当該ケース10に貼り付けられたRFタグT2から取得したケース10内の部品の数(初期数)と、実装工程においてアタッチメント30に供給した部品の数とに基づいて、現時点でのケース10内の部品の残数を算出することで残数を取得する。アタッチメント30に供給した部品の数は、例えば、アタッチメント30の開口32b付近に設置されたセンサ140の検出結果によって取得可能である。このように、第1制御装置50aは、部品の残数を確認する確認部としても機能する。 Next, the first control device 50a acquires the remaining number of parts in the case 10 (S102). The first control device 50a includes, for example, the number of parts (initial number) in the case 10 acquired from the RF tag T2 attached to the case 10 when the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30, and in the mounting process. The remaining number is obtained by calculating the remaining number of parts in the case 10 at the present time based on the number of parts supplied to the attachment 30. The number of parts supplied to the attachment 30 can be obtained, for example, by the detection result of the sensor 140 installed near the opening 32b of the attachment 30. In this way, the first control device 50a also functions as a confirmation unit for confirming the remaining number of parts.
 なお、第1制御装置50aによる部品の残数の取得方法は、上記に限定されず、例えば、部品の初期数と、実装ヘッド107により実装された(使用された)部品の数とに基づいて算出されてもよい。例えば、第1制御装置50aは、実装工程において実装した部品の数(例えば、実装ヘッド107が実装動作を行った回数)に基づいてケース10からアタッチメント30に供給された部品の数を算出してもよい。また、第1制御装置50aによる部品の残数の取得方法は、ケース10内の部品の初期数と、実装時間とに基づいて算出されてもよい。この場合、センサ140は、設けられなくてもよい。また、第1制御装置50aは、センサ140がケース10からアタッチメント30に部品が供給されているか否かを検出する場合、部品が供給されなくなった時点でケース10の残数がゼロであると判定してもよい。この場合、第1制御装置50aは、センサ140からの検出結果に基づいて、ケース10内の部品の残数を取得することができる。具体的には、第1制御装置50aは、センサ140からの検出結果に基づいて、ケース10内の部品の残数がゼロになったことを取得することができる。 The method of acquiring the remaining number of parts by the first control device 50a is not limited to the above, and is based on, for example, the initial number of parts and the number of parts mounted (used) by the mounting head 107. It may be calculated. For example, the first control device 50a calculates the number of parts supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30 based on the number of parts mounted in the mounting process (for example, the number of times the mounting head 107 has performed the mounting operation). May be good. Further, the method of acquiring the remaining number of parts by the first control device 50a may be calculated based on the initial number of parts in the case 10 and the mounting time. In this case, the sensor 140 may not be provided. Further, when the sensor 140 detects whether or not the parts are supplied from the case 10 to the attachment 30, the first control device 50a determines that the remaining number of the cases 10 is zero when the parts are no longer supplied. You may. In this case, the first control device 50a can acquire the remaining number of parts in the case 10 based on the detection result from the sensor 140. Specifically, the first control device 50a can acquire that the remaining number of parts in the case 10 has become zero based on the detection result from the sensor 140.
 次に、第1制御装置50aは、ステップS102で取得したケース10内の部品の残数に基づいて、ケース10内に部品の残数があるか否かを判定する(S103)。第1制御装置50aは、ステップS103において、ケース10内の部品の残数がゼロとなったか否かを判定してもよいし、ケース10内の部品の残数が所定数以下となったか否かを判定してもよい。所定数は、例えば、予め設定され、記憶部52に記憶されている。 Next, the first control device 50a determines whether or not there is a remaining number of parts in the case 10 based on the remaining number of parts in the case 10 acquired in step S102 (S103). The first control device 50a may determine in step S103 whether or not the remaining number of parts in the case 10 has become zero, and whether or not the remaining number of parts in the case 10 has become a predetermined number or less. May be determined. The predetermined number is set in advance and stored in the storage unit 52, for example.
 第1制御装置50aは、ケース10内の部品の残数がない場合(S103でNo)、ステップS104に進む。つまり、第1制御装置50aは、ケース10内の部品の残数がゼロとなった場合、又は、ケース10内の部品の残数が所定数以下となった場合に、ステップS104に進む。また、第1制御装置50aは、ケース10内の部品の残数がある場合(S103でYes)、ステップS101に戻り部品の供給を継続する。つまり、第1制御装置50aは、ステップS102で取得した残数に基づいて、ケース10のカバー11及びアタッチメント30のカバー32aの開状態を維持する。第1制御装置50aは、ケース10内に部品の残数がある場合に、カバー11を開ける状態を維持するとも言える。 The first control device 50a proceeds to step S104 when there is no remaining number of parts in the case 10 (No in S103). That is, the first control device 50a proceeds to step S104 when the remaining number of parts in the case 10 becomes zero or when the remaining number of parts in the case 10 becomes a predetermined number or less. Further, when there is a remaining number of parts in the case 10 (Yes in S103), the first control device 50a returns to step S101 and continues to supply the parts. That is, the first control device 50a maintains the open state of the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the attachment 30 based on the remaining number acquired in step S102. It can be said that the first control device 50a maintains the state in which the cover 11 is opened when there are remaining parts in the case 10.
 なお、第1制御装置50aは、例えば、アタッチメント30内(例えば、搬送部34内)の部品の残数又はアタッチメント30内に部品が残っていることを示す検出結果に基づいてステップS103の判定を行ってもよい。この場合、第1制御装置50aは、アタッチメント30内に所定数以上の部品がある又はアタッチメント30内に部品が残っていることを示す情報を取得すると、ステップS103でYesと判定する。当該情報は、例えば、センサ140の検出結果であってもよい。センサ140は、例えば、搬送部34の途中に配置されてもよい。例えば、センサ140は、搬送部34内において、搬送部34の上流側(ケース10側)からの部品の供給があるか否かを検出可能に設けられてもよい。 The first control device 50a determines in step S103 based on, for example, the remaining number of parts in the attachment 30 (for example, in the transport unit 34) or the detection result indicating that the parts remain in the attachment 30. You may go. In this case, when the first control device 50a acquires the information indicating that there are a predetermined number or more of parts in the attachment 30 or the parts remain in the attachment 30, it is determined as Yes in step S103. The information may be, for example, the detection result of the sensor 140. The sensor 140 may be arranged in the middle of the transport unit 34, for example. For example, the sensor 140 may be provided in the transport unit 34 so as to be able to detect whether or not there is a supply of parts from the upstream side (case 10 side) of the transport unit 34.
 上記のステップS101~S103は、実装工程の一部として実行されてもよい。 The above steps S101 to S103 may be executed as part of the mounting process.
 次に、第1制御装置50aは、ケース10を交換するために、ケース10のカバー11及びアタッチメント30のカバー32aを開状態から閉状態とする(S104)。つまり、第1制御装置50aは、ステップS102で取得した残数に基づいて、ケース10のカバー11及びアタッチメント30のカバー32aを開状態から閉状態とする。第1制御装置50aは、ケース10内に部品の残数がない場合に、カバー11を閉じるとも言える。 Next, in order to replace the case 10, the first control device 50a changes the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the attachment 30 from the open state to the closed state (S104). That is, the first control device 50a changes the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the attachment 30 from the open state to the closed state based on the remaining number acquired in step S102. It can be said that the first control device 50a closes the cover 11 when there are no remaining parts in the case 10.
 なお、ステップS104の時点で、アタッチメント30の搬送部34には、まだ部品が残っている。そのため、ステップS104以降の工程は、実装工程と平行して実行可能である。つまり、搬送部34内の部品を保持して基板103に実装しながら、ケース10を交換可能である。 At the time of step S104, parts still remain in the transport unit 34 of the attachment 30. Therefore, the steps after step S104 can be executed in parallel with the mounting step. That is, the case 10 can be replaced while holding the parts in the transport unit 34 and mounting them on the substrate 103.
 なお、残数がないケース10は、搬送ロボット60により廃棄エリアに搬送される。そのため、ステップS104において、ケース10のカバー11は、閉じられなくてもよい。つまり、ステップS104において、アタッチメント30のカバー32aが閉じられればよい。この場合、ケース10がフィーダ20の被装着部32から取り外された状態の当該被装着部32の開口32bは、カバー32aにより閉じられる。 The case 10 with no remaining number is transported to the disposal area by the transfer robot 60. Therefore, in step S104, the cover 11 of the case 10 does not have to be closed. That is, in step S104, the cover 32a of the attachment 30 may be closed. In this case, the opening 32b of the mounted portion 32 in the state where the case 10 is removed from the mounted portion 32 of the feeder 20 is closed by the cover 32a.
 また、第2制御装置50bは、搬送ロボット60に補給指示を出力することで、ケース10の交換を行わせる(S105)。搬送ロボット60は、保管エリアA1又は準備エリアA2から残数がなくなった部品を収容するケース10を、残数がなくなったケース10の位置まで搬送し、ケース10を交換する。なお、補給指示には、保管エリアA1又は準備エリアA2から搬送するケース10を特定する情報、及び、ケース10を交換する位置(例えば、フィーダ20の位置)を特定する情報が含まれてもよい。 Further, the second control device 50b causes the transfer robot 60 to replace the case 10 by outputting a supply instruction (S105). The transfer robot 60 conveys the case 10 containing the parts having no remaining number from the storage area A1 or the preparation area A2 to the position of the case 10 having no remaining number, and replaces the case 10. The replenishment instruction may include information for specifying the case 10 to be transported from the storage area A1 or the preparation area A2, and information for specifying the position for exchanging the case 10 (for example, the position of the feeder 20). ..
 ここで、搬送ロボット60がアタッチメント30にケース10を取り付ける動作について、図14を参照しながら説明する。図14は、本実施の形態に係るアタッチメント30にケース10を取り付ける様子を示す図である。なお、図14に示すケース10の移動は搬送ロボット60により行われるが、搬送ロボット60の図示を省略している。なお、図14では、係合部13及び爪部37のみ、隠れた場合を破線で示している。 Here, the operation of the transfer robot 60 to attach the case 10 to the attachment 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing how the case 10 is attached to the attachment 30 according to the present embodiment. The case 10 shown in FIG. 14 is moved by the transfer robot 60, but the transfer robot 60 is not shown. In FIG. 14, only the engaging portion 13 and the claw portion 37 are hidden by a broken line.
 図14の(a)は、ケース10の一部がアタッチメント30の被装着部32に載置された状態を示す。このとき、爪部37は、被装着部32から突出する第2の位置にある。 FIG. 14A shows a state in which a part of the case 10 is placed on the mounted portion 32 of the attachment 30. At this time, the claw portion 37 is in a second position protruding from the mounted portion 32.
 図14の(b)は、搬送ロボット60によりケース10が爪部37の位置まで移動した状態を示す。このとき、爪部37は、例えば、ケース10に押されて、被装着部32の内部に移動する。つまり、爪部37は、被装着部32に収容される第1の位置に移動する。なお、この爪部37の移動は、駆動部45により行われてもよい。また、爪部37は、当該爪部37の少なくとも一部が被装着部32に収容されてもよい。少なくとも一部が被装着部32に収容される爪部37の位置も、第1の位置に含まれる。 FIG. 14B shows a state in which the case 10 is moved to the position of the claw portion 37 by the transfer robot 60. At this time, the claw portion 37 is pushed by, for example, the case 10 and moves to the inside of the mounted portion 32. That is, the claw portion 37 moves to the first position accommodated in the mounted portion 32. The movement of the claw portion 37 may be performed by the drive portion 45. Further, as for the claw portion 37, at least a part of the claw portion 37 may be accommodated in the mounted portion 32. The position of the claw portion 37 in which at least a part thereof is housed in the mounted portion 32 is also included in the first position.
 図14の(c)は、ケース10の係合部13と爪部37とが係合して、アタッチメント30に対してケース10が固定された状態を示す。このとき、爪部37は、第2の位置にある。なお、この状態では、交換されたケース10のRFタグT2のタグ情報の照合が行われていないので、当該ケース10のカバー11及び被装着部32のカバー32aは、閉状態のままが好ましいがこれに限定されない。アタッチメント30に対してケース10が固定された状態であれば、被装着部32のカバー32aは開状態でもよい。 FIG. 14C shows a state in which the engaging portion 13 of the case 10 and the claw portion 37 are engaged and the case 10 is fixed to the attachment 30. At this time, the claw portion 37 is in the second position. In this state, the tag information of the RF tag T2 of the exchanged case 10 has not been collated. Therefore, it is preferable that the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the mounted portion 32 remain in the closed state. Not limited to this. As long as the case 10 is fixed to the attachment 30, the cover 32a of the mounted portion 32 may be in the open state.
 このように、爪部37は、被装着部32に少なくとも一部が収容される第1の位置と、被装着部32から突出する第2の位置との間で移動可能である。そして、爪部37は、第2の位置において、ケース10の下面に設けられる係合部13と係合することで、ケース10を被装着部32に対して固定する。なお、第1の位置は、第2の位置よりZ軸マイナス側の位置であればよい。 As described above, the claw portion 37 is movable between the first position in which at least a part thereof is accommodated in the mounted portion 32 and the second position protruding from the mounted portion 32. Then, the claw portion 37 engages with the engaging portion 13 provided on the lower surface of the case 10 at the second position to fix the case 10 to the mounted portion 32. The first position may be a position on the minus side of the Z axis from the second position.
 図13を再び参照して、次に、第1制御装置50aは、読取装置130を制御して、交換されたケース10のRFタグT2のタグ情報を読み取らせる(S106)。第1制御装置50aは、切替部132を制御して、読取部131とアンテナa2とを導通させる。読取部131は、アンテナa2を介してRFタグT2からタグ情報を読み取り、読み取ったタグ情報を、第1制御装置50aを介して統合制御装置50に出力する。これにより、統合制御装置50は、交換されたケース10のRFタグT2のタグ情報を取得することができる。 With reference to FIG. 13 again, the first control device 50a then controls the reading device 130 to read the tag information of the replaced RF tag T2 of the case 10 (S106). The first control device 50a controls the switching unit 132 to conduct the reading unit 131 and the antenna a2. The reading unit 131 reads the tag information from the RF tag T2 via the antenna a2, and outputs the read tag information to the integrated control device 50 via the first control device 50a. As a result, the integrated control device 50 can acquire the tag information of the RF tag T2 of the exchanged case 10.
 次に、統合制御装置50は、交換されたケースが適正であるか否かを判定する(S107)。統合制御装置50は、例えば、ステップS106で取得されたタグ情報が生産データと一致するか否かを判定してもよい。統合制御装置50は、例えば、タグ情報に含まれる部品の種類と、生産データに含まれるフィーダ20に対応する部品の種類とが一致するか否かを判定してもよい。また、統合制御装置50は、タグ情報に含まれる部品の数量が、生産データに含まれる生産に必要な部品数以上であるか判定してもよい。この場合の一致とは、部品の数量が生産データを満たすことを含む。 Next, the integrated control device 50 determines whether or not the replaced case is appropriate (S107). The integrated control device 50 may determine, for example, whether or not the tag information acquired in step S106 matches the production data. The integrated control device 50 may determine, for example, whether or not the type of the component included in the tag information and the type of the component corresponding to the feeder 20 included in the production data match. Further, the integrated control device 50 may determine whether the number of parts included in the tag information is equal to or larger than the number of parts required for production included in the production data. Matching in this case includes the quantity of parts satisfying the production data.
 なお、ステップS107では、生産データを用いずに判定が行われてもよい。例えば、統合制御装置50は、交換前後のケース10の部品の種類が一致しているか否かによりステップS107の判定を行ってもよい。また、生産データに含まれる部品の種類を用いた判定に加えて、アタッチメント30の部品種類と一致しているか否かによりステップS107の判定を行ってもよい。 Note that in step S107, the determination may be made without using the production data. For example, the integrated control device 50 may make a determination in step S107 depending on whether or not the types of parts of the case 10 before and after replacement match. Further, in addition to the determination using the types of parts included in the production data, the determination in step S107 may be performed depending on whether or not the parts match the parts type of the attachment 30.
 統合制御装置50は、交換されたケース10が適正である場合(S107でYes)、ステップS108に進む。また、統合制御装置50は、交換されたケース10が適正ではない場合(S107でNo)、ステップS105に戻り、再度ケース交換を行わせる。なお、ステップS107でYesと判定されることは、照合が成功することの一例であり、ステップS107でNoと判定されることは、照合が失敗することの一例である。 The integrated control device 50 proceeds to step S108 when the replaced case 10 is appropriate (Yes in S107). Further, when the replaced case 10 is not appropriate (No in S107), the integrated control device 50 returns to step S105 and causes the case to be replaced again. It should be noted that the determination of Yes in step S107 is an example of successful collation, and the determination of No in step S107 is an example of failure of collation.
 次に、第1制御装置50aは、統合制御装置50がステップS107でYesと判定すると、ケース10のカバー11及びアタッチメント30のカバー32aを閉状態から開状態とする(S108)。つまり、第1制御装置50aは、ステップS107の判定結果に基づいて、ケース10のカバー11及びアタッチメント30のカバー32aを閉状態から開状態とする。 Next, when the integrated control device 50 determines Yes in step S107, the first control device 50a changes the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the attachment 30 from the closed state to the open state (S108). That is, the first control device 50a changes the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the attachment 30 from the closed state to the open state based on the determination result of step S107.
 図14の(d)は、ケース10のカバー11及びアタッチメント30のカバー32aが閉状態から開状態となった状態を示す。このように、第1制御装置50aは、交換されたケース10のタグ情報と生産データとを照合し、照合が成功した場合、例えば、タグ情報と生産データとが一致する場合、カバー11及び32aを開状態とし、アタッチメント30への部品の供給を開始させる。 FIG. 14D shows a state in which the cover 11 of the case 10 and the cover 32a of the attachment 30 are changed from the closed state to the open state. As described above, the first control device 50a collates the tag information of the exchanged case 10 with the production data, and when the collation is successful, for example, when the tag information and the production data match, the covers 11 and 32a Is opened, and the supply of parts to the attachment 30 is started.
 このようにケース10が交換されることで、実装工程を止めることなく、かつ、部品の混入を抑制しつつ、ケース10の交換を行うことができる。なお、上記のステップS104~S108は、部品補給工程の一例である。部品補給工程は、搬送部34に部品が残っている状態で実行される。 By replacing the case 10 in this way, it is possible to replace the case 10 without stopping the mounting process and suppressing the mixing of parts. The above steps S104 to S108 are examples of parts replenishment steps. The parts supply step is executed with the parts remaining in the transport unit 34.
 続いて、部品実装装置100に取り付けられた台車70ごと交換するときの動作について、図15~図17を参照しながら説明する。図15は、本実施の形態に係る実装システム1のケース10及びフィーダ20を交換する動作を示すフローチャートである。具体的には、図15は、交換のための台車70を事前に準備エリアA2に準備する動作を示す。図16は、図15に示すタグ情報を取得する動作を示すフローチャートである。図16では、RFタグが長距離用のRFタグである例について説明する。長距離用のRFタグとは、例えば、1~2m程度の通信が可能なRFタグである。なお、RFタグは、短距離用のRFタグであってもよい。短距離用のRFタグは、長距離用のRFタグより通信距離が短く、例えば、数10cm程度である。 Subsequently, the operation when the dolly 70 attached to the component mounting device 100 is replaced will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 17. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an operation of exchanging the case 10 and the feeder 20 of the mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment. Specifically, FIG. 15 shows an operation of preparing a dolly 70 for replacement in the preparation area A2 in advance. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an operation of acquiring the tag information shown in FIG. FIG. 16 describes an example in which the RF tag is an RF tag for a long distance. The RF tag for a long distance is, for example, an RF tag capable of communication of about 1 to 2 m. The RF tag may be an RF tag for a short distance. The RF tag for a short distance has a shorter communication distance than the RF tag for a long distance, for example, about several tens of centimeters.
 図15に示すように、第2制御装置50bは、準備エリアA2に配置された台車70に、ケース10及びアタッチメント30を取り付ける(S201)。第2制御装置50bは、例えば、生産データに基づいて、次の生産において使用される部品を収容するケース10及び当該ケース10に対応したアタッチメント30を、搬送ロボット60を制御して台車70が保持するフィーダ本体部40に取り付ける。なお、フィーダ本体部40は、台車70のフィーダスロットに予め取り付けられているものとする。 As shown in FIG. 15, the second control device 50b attaches the case 10 and the attachment 30 to the trolley 70 arranged in the preparation area A2 (S201). The second control device 50b controls the transfer robot 60 to hold a case 10 for accommodating parts used in the next production and an attachment 30 corresponding to the case 10, based on, for example, production data. It is attached to the feeder main body 40. It is assumed that the feeder main body 40 is preliminarily attached to the feeder slot of the carriage 70.
 台車70には、複数のフィーダ本体部40が取り付けられており、ステップS201では、複数のフィーダ本体部40のそれぞれにケース10及び当該ケース10に対応したアタッチメント30が取り付けられたとする。なお、アンテナは、複数のフィーダ本体部40のそれぞれに配置される。 It is assumed that a plurality of feeder main bodies 40 are attached to the carriage 70, and in step S201, a case 10 and an attachment 30 corresponding to the case 10 are attached to each of the plurality of feeder main bodies 40. The antenna is arranged in each of the plurality of feeder main body portions 40.
 次に、第1制御装置50aは、複数のRFタグT2及びT3のそれぞれから当該RFタグT2及びT3に記憶されているタグ情報を取得する(S202)。第1制御装置50aは、RFタグT2及びT3が長距離用のRFタグであるので、複数のRFタグT2及びT3のそれぞれから信号を同時に取得する。そのため、第1制御装置50aは、アンテナa1に対応するRFタグT2及びT3を、取得したタグ情報から特定することができない。そこで、本実施の形態では、第1制御装置50aは、複数のRFタグT2及びT3のそれぞれから受信した信号の電波強度に基づいて、当該アンテナa1に対応するRFタグT2及びT3を特定する。なお、ステップS202では、例えば、RFタグT2及びT3の少なくとも一方のタグ情報が取得されればよい。以下では、第1制御装置50aは、RFタグT2を特定する場合について説明するが、RFタグT3を特定する場合も同様に行われてもよい。なお、ステップS202において、統合制御装置50の制御部51が複数のRFタグT2及びT3のそれぞれから当該RFタグT2及びT3に記憶されているタグ情報を取得してもよい。つまり、タグ情報を取得するのは、第1制御装置50aであってもよいし、制御部51であってもよい。 Next, the first control device 50a acquires the tag information stored in the RF tags T2 and T3 from each of the plurality of RF tags T2 and T3 (S202). Since the RF tags T2 and T3 are RF tags for long distances, the first control device 50a simultaneously acquires signals from each of the plurality of RF tags T2 and T3. Therefore, the first control device 50a cannot specify the RF tags T2 and T3 corresponding to the antenna a1 from the acquired tag information. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first control device 50a identifies the RF tags T2 and T3 corresponding to the antenna a1 based on the radio wave intensity of the signals received from each of the plurality of RF tags T2 and T3. In step S202, for example, at least one of the RF tags T2 and T3 may be acquired. Hereinafter, the case where the first control device 50a specifies the RF tag T2 will be described, but the case where the RF tag T3 is specified may be specified in the same manner. In step S202, the control unit 51 of the integrated control device 50 may acquire the tag information stored in the RF tags T2 and T3 from each of the plurality of RF tags T2 and T3. That is, the tag information may be acquired by the first control device 50a or the control unit 51.
 図16に示すように、第1制御装置50aは、複数のRFタグT2のそれぞれからの信号の電波強度を取得する(S301)。第1制御装置50aは、RFタグT2から取得した信号に基づいて当該信号の電波強度(信号強度)を算出する。 As shown in FIG. 16, the first control device 50a acquires the radio wave intensity of the signal from each of the plurality of RF tags T2 (S301). The first control device 50a calculates the radio wave strength (signal strength) of the signal based on the signal acquired from the RF tag T2.
 次に、第1制御装置50aは、複数の電波強度に基づいて、当該アンテナa1に対応するRFタグT2を特定する(S302)。具体的には、第1制御装置50aは、複数の電波強度のうち最も電波強度が強い信号に対応するRFタグT2を、当該アンテナa1に対応するRFタグT2であると判定する。図17は、アンテナa1に対応するRFタグT2を特定する処理を説明するための模式図である。なお、図17に示す両矢印の幅は、それぞれのRFタグT2から最も左側に配置されたアンテナa1へ送信された信号の強度を示す。幅が大きいほど、信号強度が高いことを示す。 Next, the first control device 50a identifies the RF tag T2 corresponding to the antenna a1 based on the plurality of radio wave intensities (S302). Specifically, the first control device 50a determines that the RF tag T2 corresponding to the signal having the strongest radio field strength among the plurality of radio wave strengths is the RF tag T2 corresponding to the antenna a1. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram for explaining a process of specifying the RF tag T2 corresponding to the antenna a1. The width of the double-headed arrow shown in FIG. 17 indicates the strength of the signal transmitted from each RF tag T2 to the antenna a1 arranged on the leftmost side. The larger the width, the higher the signal strength.
 図17に示すように、電波強度は、アンテナa1とRFタグT2との距離に応じて変化するので、当該電波強度に基づいてRFタグT2を特定することで、アンテナa1に対応するRFタグT2を精度よく特定することができる。図17の例では、Y軸プラス側のアンテナa1に対応するRFタグT2は、Y軸プラス側のRFタグT2であることがわかる。 As shown in FIG. 17, the radio field intensity changes according to the distance between the antenna a1 and the RF tag T2. Therefore, by specifying the RF tag T2 based on the radio wave strength, the RF tag T2 corresponding to the antenna a1 is specified. Can be specified accurately. In the example of FIG. 17, it can be seen that the RF tag T2 corresponding to the antenna a1 on the Y-axis plus side is the RF tag T2 on the Y-axis plus side.
 なお、アイソレーションを確保するために、フィーダ20それぞれの側面(Y軸側の面)は、金属で形成されるとよい。 In order to ensure isolation, the side surfaces (Y-axis side surfaces) of each feeder 20 may be formed of metal.
 図16を再び参照して、次に、第1制御装置50aは、全てのアンテナa1に対してRFタグT2を特定したか否かを判定する(S303)。第1制御装置50aは、全てのアンテナa1に対してRFタグT2を特定した場合(S303でYes)、図15に示すステップS203に進む。また、第1制御装置50aは、全てのアンテナa1に対してRFタグT2を特定していない場合(S303でNo)、ステップS301に戻り残りのアンテナa1に対してステップS301以降の処理を継続する。具体的には、第1制御装置50aは、切替部132を制御して読取部131と接続されるアンテナa1を切り替えて、切り替えられたアンテナa1に対してステップS301以降の処理を行う。第1制御装置50aは、取得したタグ情報を統合制御装置50に出力する。 With reference to FIG. 16 again, the first control device 50a then determines whether or not the RF tag T2 has been specified for all the antennas a1 (S303). When the RF tag T2 is specified for all the antennas a1 (Yes in S303), the first control device 50a proceeds to step S203 shown in FIG. Further, when the RF tag T2 is not specified for all the antennas a1 (No in S303), the first control device 50a returns to step S301 and continues the processing after step S301 for the remaining antennas a1. .. Specifically, the first control device 50a controls the switching unit 132 to switch the antenna a1 connected to the reading unit 131, and performs the processing after step S301 on the switched antenna a1. The first control device 50a outputs the acquired tag information to the integrated control device 50.
 図15を再び参照して、次に、統合制御装置50は、タグ情報に基づいて、フィーダ本体部40に取り付けられたケース10及びアタッチメント30が適正か否かを判定する(S203)。統合制御装置50は、例えば、タグ情報と生産データとを照合することで、ステップS203の判定を行ってもよい。統合制御装置50は、例えば、フィーダ本体部40に取り付けられたケース10及びアタッチメント30のタグ情報に含まれる部品の種類と、生産データに含まれる当該フィーダ本体部40に取り付けられる部品の種類とが一致する場合に、ケース10及びアタッチメント30の取り付け位置は適正である(ケース10及びアタッチメント30が適正なフィーダ本体部40に取り付けられている)ので、ケース10及びアタッチメント30が適正であると判定する(S203でYes)。また、統合制御装置50は、例えば、例えば、フィーダ本体部40に取り付けられたケース10及びアタッチメント30のタグ情報に含まれる部品の種類と、生産データに含まれる当該フィーダ本体部40に取り付けられる部品の種類とが一致しない場合に、ケース10及びアタッチメント30の取り付け位置は適正ではないと判定する(S203でNo)。統合制御装置50は、フィーダ本体部40のそれぞれにおいて、ステップS203の判定を行う。なお、アタッチメントの取付位置が適正かどうかの判定は、生産データを用いずに行われてもよい。統合制御装置50は、例えば、アタッチメント30のタグ情報及びケース10のタグ情報の部品種類が一致しているか否かによりステップS203の判定を行ってもよい。なお、アタッチメントの取付位置が適正かどうかを判定する場合も同様に生産データを用いて行われてもよい。 With reference to FIG. 15 again, the integrated control device 50 then determines whether or not the case 10 and the attachment 30 attached to the feeder main body 40 are appropriate based on the tag information (S203). The integrated control device 50 may make a determination in step S203, for example, by collating the tag information with the production data. In the integrated control device 50, for example, the types of parts included in the tag information of the case 10 and the attachment 30 attached to the feeder main body 40 and the types of parts attached to the feeder main body 40 included in the production data are different. If they match, the mounting positions of the case 10 and the attachment 30 are appropriate (the case 10 and the attachment 30 are attached to the appropriate feeder main body 40), so that the case 10 and the attachment 30 are determined to be appropriate. (Yes in S203). Further, the integrated control device 50 includes, for example, the types of parts included in the tag information of the case 10 and the attachment 30 attached to the feeder main body 40, and the parts attached to the feeder main body 40 included in the production data. If the types do not match, it is determined that the mounting positions of the case 10 and the attachment 30 are not appropriate (No in S203). The integrated control device 50 makes a determination in step S203 in each of the feeder main body portions 40. It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the attachment position of the attachment is appropriate may be performed without using the production data. The integrated control device 50 may make a determination in step S203 depending on whether or not the component types of the tag information of the attachment 30 and the tag information of the case 10 match, for example. In addition, when determining whether or not the attachment position of the attachment is appropriate, the production data may be used in the same manner.
 次に、第1制御装置50aは、統合制御装置50がステップS203でYesと判定すると、部品実装装置100の台車70に取り付けられているアタッチメント30のケース10側のカバー32aを開状態から閉状態とする(S204)。このとき、第1制御装置50aは、ケース10のカバー11も開状態から閉状態としてもよい。 Next, when the integrated control device 50 determines Yes in step S203, the first control device 50a opens the cover 32a on the case 10 side of the attachment 30 attached to the carriage 70 of the component mounting device 100 from the open state to the closed state. (S204). At this time, the first control device 50a may also change the cover 11 of the case 10 from the open state to the closed state.
 次に、第2制御装置50bは、部品実装装置100の台車70を取り外し、フィーダ本体部40のそれぞれにおいてステップS203でYesと判定された台車70(ケース10及びアタッチメント30が適正である台車70)を部品実装装置100に取り付ける(S205)。第1制御装置50aは、新たに取り付けられた当該台車70のアタッチメント30のケース側のカバー32aを閉状態から開状態とする(S206)。このとき、第1制御装置50aは、ケース10のカバー11も閉状態から開状態としてもよい。 Next, the second control device 50b removes the trolley 70 of the component mounting device 100, and the trolley 70 determined to be Yes in step S203 in each of the feeder main body 40 (the trolley 70 in which the case 10 and the attachment 30 are appropriate). Is attached to the component mounting device 100 (S205). The first control device 50a changes the cover 32a on the case side of the attachment 30 of the newly attached trolley 70 from the closed state to the open state (S206). At this time, in the first control device 50a, the cover 11 of the case 10 may also be changed from the closed state to the open state.
 このようにケース10及びフィーダ20が取り付けられた台車70が交換されることで、部品の混入を抑制しつつ、台車70の交換を迅速に行うことができる。なお、上記のステップS201~S206は、部品補給工程の一例である。 By replacing the dolly 70 to which the case 10 and the feeder 20 are attached in this way, it is possible to quickly replace the dolly 70 while suppressing the mixing of parts. The above steps S201 to S206 are examples of the parts replenishment process.
 [1-4.効果など]
 以上のように、本実施の形態に係る実装方法は、バルク状態の部品を収容するケース10が着脱可能であり、ケース10から供給された部品を収容するアタッチメント30を有するフィーダ20と、フィーダ20により供給される部品を保持して基板103に実装する実装ヘッド107とを備える実装システム1における実装方法である。当該実装方法は、実装ヘッド107によりフィーダ20内の部品を保持して基板103に実装する実装工程と、アタッチメント30に部品が残っている状態で、ケース10を交換する部品補給工程(S104~S108)とを含む。
[1-4. Effect etc.]
As described above, in the mounting method according to the present embodiment, the feeder 20 having the attachment 30 for accommodating the parts supplied from the case 10 and the feeder 20 for accommodating the parts in a bulk state can be attached and detached. It is a mounting method in the mounting system 1 including a mounting head 107 that holds the components supplied by the vehicle and mounts the components on the substrate 103. The mounting method includes a mounting process in which the components in the feeder 20 are held by the mounting head 107 and mounted on the substrate 103, and a component replenishment step (S104 to S108) in which the case 10 is replaced with the components remaining in the attachment 30. ) And.
 なお、ケース10は第1の収容部の一例であり、アタッチメント30は第2の収容部の一例である。 The case 10 is an example of the first accommodating portion, and the attachment 30 is an example of the second accommodating portion.
 これにより、アタッチメント30(具体的には、搬送部34)内に部品が残っている状態で、ケース10を交換することができる。例えば、実装工程中にケース10を交換する場合、アタッチメント30の内部に残っている部品で実装を継続しながら、ケース10を交換することができる。つまり、ケース10を交換するときに実装工程における生産性の低下を抑制することができる。よって、アタッチメント30内の部品がなくなってからケース10を交換する場合に比べて、実装工程における生産性の低下を抑制することができる。 As a result, the case 10 can be replaced with the parts remaining in the attachment 30 (specifically, the transport unit 34). For example, when the case 10 is replaced during the mounting process, the case 10 can be replaced while continuing the mounting with the parts remaining inside the attachment 30. That is, when the case 10 is replaced, it is possible to suppress a decrease in productivity in the mounting process. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in productivity in the mounting process as compared with the case where the case 10 is replaced after the parts in the attachment 30 are exhausted.
 また、部品補給工程は、実装工程において、基板103に対する部品の実装が時間的に連続して行われている間に実行される。 Further, the component supply process is executed while the components are mounted on the substrate 103 continuously in time in the mounting process.
 これにより、実装工程と部品補給工程とが並行して行われる。実装工程を継続しながら、つまり基板103に対する部品の実装を時間的に連続して行いながら、ケース10の交換を行うことができる。つまり、実装工程を止めることなく、ケース10を交換することができる。よって、実装工程を止めてケース10を交換する場合に比べて、より確実に生産性の低下を抑制することができる。 As a result, the mounting process and the parts supply process are performed in parallel. The case 10 can be replaced while continuing the mounting process, that is, while mounting the components on the substrate 103 continuously in time. That is, the case 10 can be replaced without stopping the mounting process. Therefore, as compared with the case where the mounting process is stopped and the case 10 is replaced, the decrease in productivity can be suppressed more reliably.
 また、部品補給工程では、部品の残数を確認する統合制御装置50の出力に基づいて、ケース10の開口15に設けられるカバー11を開閉する。 Further, in the parts replenishment process, the cover 11 provided in the opening 15 of the case 10 is opened and closed based on the output of the integrated control device 50 for confirming the remaining number of parts.
 なお、統合制御装置50は、確認部の一例である。また、統合制御装置50の出力は、残数に関する判定結果であってもよい。 The integrated control device 50 is an example of a confirmation unit. Further, the output of the integrated control device 50 may be a determination result regarding the remaining number.
 これにより、部品の残数(例えば、ケース10内又はアタッチメント30内の部品の残数)に基づいてケース10のカバー11が開閉されるので、例えばケース10の交換時に当該ケース10に他の部品が混入することを抑制することができる。 As a result, the cover 11 of the case 10 is opened and closed based on the remaining number of parts (for example, the remaining number of parts in the case 10 or the attachment 30). Therefore, for example, when the case 10 is replaced, other parts are added to the case 10. Can be suppressed from being mixed.
 また、部品補給工程では、ケース10に収容される部品の種類に基づいて、カバー11が開閉される。 Further, in the parts supply process, the cover 11 is opened and closed based on the type of parts housed in the case 10.
 これにより、例えば、使用する部品とは異なる種類の部品を収容するケースが誤ってアタッチメント30に取り付けられた場合、当該ケースのカバー11を閉じたままとすることができるので、アタッチメント30内で部品が混入することを抑制することができる。つまり、アタッチメント30内において部品が混入したときの対応作業を行うことを抑制することができる。よって、そのような対応作業に伴う生産性の低下を抑制することができる。 As a result, for example, if a case accommodating a part different from the part to be used is mistakenly attached to the attachment 30, the cover 11 of the case can be kept closed, so that the part can be kept closed in the attachment 30. Can be suppressed from being mixed. That is, it is possible to suppress the corresponding work when the parts are mixed in the attachment 30. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in productivity due to such a corresponding work.
 また、部品補給工程では、ケース10がフィーダ20の被装着部32から取り外された状態の当該被装着部32の開口32bがカバー32aにより閉じられる。 Further, in the parts supply step, the opening 32b of the mounted portion 32 in a state where the case 10 is removed from the mounted portion 32 of the feeder 20 is closed by the cover 32a.
 これにより、部品補給工程において、ケース10がアタッチメント30から取り外された後、新しいケース10が取り付けられるまでの間に、アタッチメント30内に他の部品が混入してしまうことを抑制することができる。つまり、アタッチメント30内において部品が混入したときの対応作業を行うことを抑制することができる。よって、そのような対応作業に伴う生産性の低下を抑制することができる。 This makes it possible to prevent other parts from being mixed into the attachment 30 after the case 10 is removed from the attachment 30 and before a new case 10 is attached in the parts supply process. That is, it is possible to suppress the corresponding work when the parts are mixed in the attachment 30. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in productivity due to such a corresponding work.
 また、以上のように、本実施の形態に係る実装システム1は、バルク状態の部品を収容するケース10が着脱可能であり、ケース10から供給された部品を収容するアタッチメント30を有するフィーダ20と、フィーダ20により供給される部品を保持して基板103に実装する実装ヘッド107と、アタッチメント30に部品が残っている状態で、ケースを交換する制御を行う制御部51とを備える。 Further, as described above, in the mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment, the case 10 for accommodating the bulk state parts is detachable, and the feeder 20 has the attachment 30 for accommodating the parts supplied from the case 10. A mounting head 107 that holds the components supplied by the feeder 20 and mounts the components on the substrate 103, and a control unit 51 that controls the replacement of the case with the components remaining on the attachment 30 are provided.
 これにより、上記の実装方法と同様の効果を奏する。つまり、アタッチメント30内の部品がなくなってからケース10を交換する場合に比べて、実装工程における生産性の低下を抑制することができる。 This has the same effect as the above mounting method. That is, it is possible to suppress a decrease in productivity in the mounting process as compared with the case where the case 10 is replaced after the parts in the attachment 30 are exhausted.
 また、以上のように、本実施の形態に係るフィーダ20は、バルク状態の部品を収容するケース10が着脱可能に取り付けられる被装着部32を備える。被装着部32は、ケース10の開口15に設けられるカバー11に作用する棒体33を有する。棒体33は、ケース10が被装着部32に装着された状態でカバー11に物理的に作用することで、カバー11を閉状態から開状態とする。 Further, as described above, the feeder 20 according to the present embodiment includes a mounted portion 32 to which a case 10 for accommodating bulk parts is detachably attached. The mounted portion 32 has a rod body 33 that acts on the cover 11 provided in the opening 15 of the case 10. The rod body 33 physically acts on the cover 11 in a state where the case 10 is mounted on the mounted portion 32, so that the cover 11 is opened from the closed state.
 なお、ケース10は収容体の一例であり、開口15は第1開口の一例であり、カバー11は第1カバーの一例であり、棒体33は作用部の一例である。 The case 10 is an example of the housing, the opening 15 is an example of the first opening, the cover 11 is an example of the first cover, and the rod 33 is an example of the working part.
 これにより、カバー11を開閉するための棒体33が、フィーダ20が備える被装着部32に設けられる。そのため、ケース10が被装着部32に装着された状態で、当該棒体33による物理的な作用(例えば、押圧)により、カバー11を開けることができる。つまり、フィーダ20は、特許文献1のように、シャッタ開閉レバーによってシャッタ開閉板を駆動させることなく、カバー11を開閉させることができる。よって、本実施の形態に係るフィーダ20によれば、カバー11の開閉における作業性の低下を抑制することができる。 As a result, a rod body 33 for opening and closing the cover 11 is provided on the mounted portion 32 included in the feeder 20. Therefore, with the case 10 mounted on the mounted portion 32, the cover 11 can be opened by a physical action (for example, pressing) by the rod body 33. That is, the feeder 20 can open and close the cover 11 without driving the shutter opening / closing plate by the shutter opening / closing lever as in Patent Document 1. Therefore, according to the feeder 20 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability when opening and closing the cover 11.
 また、被装着部32は、ケース10の下面に突出して設けられる第2の凸部18に係合するガイド部39を有する。ガイド部39は、ケース10の幅方向の両端を支持する支持部39aと、支持部39aの間に設けられた溝部39bとを有し、溝部39bの幅方向の長さ(幅w3)は、ケース10の幅方向の長さ(幅w2)より短い。 Further, the mounted portion 32 has a guide portion 39 that engages with a second convex portion 18 that is provided so as to project from the lower surface of the case 10. The guide portion 39 has a support portion 39a that supports both ends of the case 10 in the width direction and a groove portion 39b provided between the support portions 39a, and the length (width w3) of the groove portion 39b in the width direction is set. It is shorter than the length of the case 10 in the width direction (width w2).
 なお、第2の凸部18は、凸部の一例である。 The second convex portion 18 is an example of the convex portion.
 これにより、ケース10の側面(例えば、Y軸方向の面)に第2の凸部18が形成されている場合に比べて、ケース10の幅w2を広くとることができるので、ケース10における部品の収容量を増やすことができる。よって、実装工程において、ケース10の交換頻度を少なくすることができるので、生産性が向上する。 As a result, the width w2 of the case 10 can be widened as compared with the case where the second convex portion 18 is formed on the side surface of the case 10 (for example, the surface in the Y-axis direction), so that the component in the case 10 can be widened. Can be increased in capacity. Therefore, in the mounting process, the frequency of replacement of the case 10 can be reduced, and the productivity is improved.
 また、被装着部32は、被装着部32に収容される第1の位置と、被装着部32から突出する第2の位置との間で移動可能な爪部37を有する。爪部37は、第2の位置において、ケース10の下面に設けられる係合部13と係合することで、ケース10を被装着部32に対して固定する。 Further, the mounted portion 32 has a claw portion 37 that can be moved between a first position housed in the mounted portion 32 and a second position protruding from the mounted portion 32. At the second position, the claw portion 37 engages with the engaging portion 13 provided on the lower surface of the case 10 to fix the case 10 to the mounted portion 32.
 これにより、被装着部32の爪部37とケース10の係合部13とを係合するといった簡易な固定方法で、ケース10を被装着部32に対して固定することができる。また、爪部37は、第1の位置と第2の位置との間を移動可能であることで、容易にケース10を被装着部32に対して固定することができる。よって、ケース10を被装着部32に対して固定するときの作業性が向上する。 Thereby, the case 10 can be fixed to the mounted portion 32 by a simple fixing method such as engaging the claw portion 37 of the mounted portion 32 with the engaging portion 13 of the case 10. Further, since the claw portion 37 can move between the first position and the second position, the case 10 can be easily fixed to the mounted portion 32. Therefore, workability when fixing the case 10 to the mounted portion 32 is improved.
 また、カバー11は、ケース10に対して回転軸Jを中心に回転可能に支持されている。棒体33は、カバー11を押圧することで、回転軸Jを中心にカバー11を回転させる。 Further, the cover 11 is rotatably supported about the rotation axis J with respect to the case 10. By pressing the cover 11, the rod body 33 rotates the cover 11 about the rotation axis J.
 これにより、棒体33は、カバー11を押圧するだけでカバー11を開状態とすることができる。よって、カバー11を開状態とするときの作業性が向上する。 As a result, the rod body 33 can open the cover 11 simply by pressing the cover 11. Therefore, workability when the cover 11 is opened is improved.
 また、フィーダ20は、ケース10から供給された部品を搬送する搬送部34と、被装着部32及び搬送部34が着脱可能に取り付けられるフィーダ本体部40とをさらに備える。 Further, the feeder 20 further includes a transport unit 34 for transporting the parts supplied from the case 10, and a feeder main body portion 40 to which the mounted portion 32 and the transport portion 34 are detachably attached.
 なお、搬送部34は、部品搬送部の一例である。 The transport unit 34 is an example of a parts transport unit.
 これにより、被装着部32及び搬送部34をケース10に収容される部品ごとに設けることができる。よって、搬送部34が部品によらず共用されている場合に比べて、搬送部34内において部品が混入することを抑制することができる。 Thereby, the mounted portion 32 and the transport portion 34 can be provided for each part accommodated in the case 10. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the mixing of parts in the transport unit 34 as compared with the case where the transport unit 34 is shared regardless of the parts.
 また、フィーダ20は、被装着部32は、ケース10が被装着部32に装着された状態で、ケース10の開口15に対応する位置に形成される開口32bに設けられるカバー32aを有する。 Further, the feeder 20 has a cover 32a provided in the opening 32b formed at a position corresponding to the opening 15 of the case 10 in a state where the mounted portion 32 is mounted on the mounted portion 32.
 なお、開口32bは第2開口の一例であり、カバー32aは第2カバーの一例である。 The opening 32b is an example of the second opening, and the cover 32a is an example of the second cover.
 これにより、例えば、被装着部32に装着されているケース10を交換するときに、開口32bをカバー32aにより閉じることができる。これにより、ケース10交換時に、搬送部34内において部品が混入することを抑制することができる。 Thereby, for example, when the case 10 mounted on the mounted portion 32 is replaced, the opening 32b can be closed by the cover 32a. As a result, it is possible to prevent parts from being mixed in the transport unit 34 when the case 10 is replaced.
 また、以上のように、本実施の形態に係るケース10は、上記のフィーダ20に取り付けられるケースであって、バルク状態の部品を収容する収容室12aと、収容室12aからフィーダ20に部品を供給するための開口15に設けられるカバー11とを備える。カバー11は、ケース10が着脱される被装着部32の棒体33が物理的に作用することで閉状態から開状態となる。 Further, as described above, the case 10 according to the present embodiment is a case attached to the feeder 20 described above, and the storage chamber 12a for accommodating the parts in a bulk state and the parts from the accommodation chamber 12a to the feeder 20. It is provided with a cover 11 provided in the opening 15 for supplying. The cover 11 is changed from the closed state to the open state by the physical action of the rod body 33 of the mounted portion 32 to which the case 10 is attached / detached.
 これにより、上記のフィーダ20と同様の効果を奏する。つまり、ケース10によれば、カバー11の開閉における作業性の低下を抑制することができる。 This has the same effect as the feeder 20 described above. That is, according to the case 10, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability when opening and closing the cover 11.
 また、ケース10の壁面に設けられる第1の凸部14をさらに備える。第1の凸部14は、当該第1の凸部14を把持するときの把持位置を決める位置決め部14aを有する。 Further, a first convex portion 14 provided on the wall surface of the case 10 is further provided. The first convex portion 14 has a positioning portion 14a that determines a gripping position when gripping the first convex portion 14.
 なお、第1の凸部14は、凸部の一例である。 The first convex portion 14 is an example of the convex portion.
 これにより、ケース10が搬送ロボット60等で搬送される場合、当該搬送ロボット60のロボットアーム61がケース10を適切に把持することができる確実性が増す。 As a result, when the case 10 is conveyed by the transfer robot 60 or the like, the certainty that the robot arm 61 of the transfer robot 60 can appropriately grip the case 10 is increased.
 また、収容室12aは、開口15に向かって下方に傾斜する傾斜面16を有する。 Further, the accommodation chamber 12a has an inclined surface 16 that inclines downward toward the opening 15.
 これにより、ケース10から搬送部34に部品が供給されやすくなる。 This makes it easier for parts to be supplied from the case 10 to the transport unit 34.
 また、以上のように、本実施の形態に係る実装システム1は、上記のフィーダ20と、基板103を搬送する基板搬送機構102と、フィーダ20から部品を取り出し基板103に実装する実装ヘッド107とを備えてもよい。 Further, as described above, the mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment includes the feeder 20, the board transport mechanism 102 that transports the substrate 103, and the mounting head 107 that takes out components from the feeder 20 and mounts them on the substrate 103. May be provided.
 なお、基板搬送機構102は基板搬送部の一例であり、実装ヘッド107は部品実装部の一例であり、基板103は対象物の一例である。 The board transfer mechanism 102 is an example of a board transfer section, the mounting head 107 is an example of a component mounting section, and the board 103 is an example of an object.
 これにより、カバー11の開閉における作業性の低下が抑制された実装システム1を実現することができる。 As a result, it is possible to realize the mounting system 1 in which the deterioration of workability in opening and closing the cover 11 is suppressed.
 また、以上のように、本実施の形態に係る実装システム1は、バルク状態の部品を収容するケースが着脱可能なフィーダ20と、フィーダ20が配置される台車70と、フィーダ20により供給された部品を保持して対象物に実装する実装ヘッド107と、フィーダ20に設けられるRFタグT1、及び、ケース10に設けられるRFタグT2に含まれる情報を読み取り可能であり、台車70に設けられる読取装置130とを備えてもよい。 Further, as described above, the mounting system 1 according to the present embodiment is supplied by the feeder 20 in which the case for accommodating the bulk parts is detachable, the carriage 70 in which the feeder 20 is arranged, and the feeder 20. It is possible to read the information contained in the mounting head 107 that holds the components and mounts them on the object, the RF tag T1 provided on the feeder 20, and the RF tag T2 provided on the case 10, and is provided on the trolley 70. The device 130 may be provided.
 なお、台車70はフィーダ配置部の一例であり、RFタグT1は第1のRFタグの一例であり、RFタグT2は第2のRFタグの一例である。 The dolly 70 is an example of a feeder arrangement portion, the RF tag T1 is an example of a first RF tag, and the RF tag T2 is an example of a second RF tag.
 これにより、読取装置130は、2つのRFタグのそれぞれから、情報(タグ情報)を取得することができる。例えば、バーコードを読ませることにより場合に比べて、タグ情報を取得する手間を低減することができる。よって、タグ情報を取得するときの作業性が向上する。 Thereby, the reading device 130 can acquire information (tag information) from each of the two RF tags. For example, by reading the barcode, it is possible to reduce the time and effort required to acquire the tag information. Therefore, workability when acquiring tag information is improved.
 また、読取装置130は、RFタグT1に対して信号を送受信可能なアンテナa1と、RFタグT2に対して信号を送受信可能なアンテナa2とを有する。 Further, the reading device 130 has an antenna a1 capable of transmitting and receiving a signal to the RF tag T1 and an antenna a2 capable of transmitting and receiving a signal to the RF tag T2.
 なお、アンテナa1は第1のアンテナの一例であり、アンテナa2は第2のアンテナの一例である。 Note that the antenna a1 is an example of the first antenna, and the antenna a2 is an example of the second antenna.
 これにより、2つのRFタグのそれぞれにアンテナが設けられるので、アンテナが共用されている場合に比べて、それぞれRFタグから効率的にタグ情報を取得することができる。 As a result, since an antenna is provided for each of the two RF tags, tag information can be efficiently acquired from each RF tag as compared with the case where the antenna is shared.
 また、実装システム1は、アンテナa2からケース10に設けられるRFタグT2に対して信号を伝送可能な伝送部をさらに備えてもよい。 Further, the mounting system 1 may further include a transmission unit capable of transmitting a signal from the antenna a2 to the RF tag T2 provided in the case 10.
 これにより、アンテナa2は、直接RFタグT2に対して信号を送受信できない場合であっても、伝送部を介して信号を送受信することができる。 As a result, the antenna a2 can transmit and receive a signal via the transmission unit even when the signal cannot be directly transmitted and received to the RF tag T2.
 また、実装システム1の伝送部は、フィーダ20に設けられ、RFタグT2と対向するように配置されるアンテナa3と、フィーダ20に設けられ、アンテナとa2対向するように配置されるアンテナa4と、アンテナa3とアンテナa4とを接続するケーブルC3とを有する。 Further, the transmission unit of the mounting system 1 includes an antenna a3 provided on the feeder 20 and arranged so as to face the RF tag T2, and an antenna a4 provided on the feeder 20 and arranged so as to face the antenna a2. , A cable C3 connecting the antenna a3 and the antenna a4.
 なお、アンテナa3は第3のアンテナの一例であり、アンテナa4は第4のアンテナの一例である。 Note that the antenna a3 is an example of the third antenna, and the antenna a4 is an example of the fourth antenna.
 これにより、アンテナa2は、直接RFタグT2に対して信号を送受信できない場合であっても、アンテナa4、ケーブルC3及びアンテナa3を介して信号を送受信することができる。また、アンテナa3とアンテナa4とがケーブルC3で接続されるので、アンテナa3及びアンテナa4を配置する位置の自由度が増す。 As a result, the antenna a2 can transmit and receive signals via the antenna a4, the cable C3, and the antenna a3 even when the signal cannot be directly transmitted and received to the RF tag T2. Further, since the antenna a3 and the antenna a4 are connected by the cable C3, the degree of freedom in the position where the antenna a3 and the antenna a4 are arranged is increased.
 また、台車70は、複数のフィーダ20が配置可能に構成される。読取装置130は、複数のフィーダ20それぞれにアンテナa1を有し、複数のアンテナa1のそれぞれにおいて、複数のフィーダ20それぞれのRFタグT1から受信する信号の強度に基づいて、当該アンテナa1に対応するRFタグT1を判定する。 Further, the dolly 70 is configured so that a plurality of feeders 20 can be arranged. The reading device 130 has an antenna a1 in each of the plurality of feeders 20, and corresponds to the antenna a1 in each of the plurality of antennas a1 based on the strength of the signal received from the RF tag T1 of each of the plurality of feeders 20. The RF tag T1 is determined.
 これにより、信号強度を用いることで、容易にかつ正確に、対応するRFタグT1を判定することができる。 Thereby, by using the signal strength, the corresponding RF tag T1 can be easily and accurately determined.
 また、フィーダ20は、フィーダ本体部40と、フィーダ本体部40に対して着脱可能であり、かつ、ケース10が着脱可能に取り付けられる被装着部32を有するアタッチメント30とを有してもよい。 Further, the feeder 20 may have a feeder main body 40 and an attachment 30 having an attached portion 32 that is detachable to and detachable from the feeder main body 40 and to which the case 10 is detachably attached.
 これにより、フィーダ20は、フィーダ本体部40とアタッチメント30とに分離可能である。例えば、アタッチメント30が部品ごとに設定されることで、アタッチメント30内での部品の混入が発生することを抑制することができる。 Thereby, the feeder 20 can be separated into the feeder main body 40 and the attachment 30. For example, by setting the attachment 30 for each component, it is possible to prevent the components from being mixed in the attachment 30.
 また、RFタグT1は、フィーダ本体部40に設けられ、読取装置130は、アタッチメント30に設けられるRFタグT3に対して信号を送受信可能なアンテナa4を有する。 Further, the RF tag T1 is provided in the feeder main body 40, and the reading device 130 has an antenna a4 capable of transmitting and receiving signals to the RF tag T3 provided in the attachment 30.
 なお、RFタグT3は第3のRFタグの一例であり、アンテナa5は第5のアンテナの一例である。 The RF tag T3 is an example of a third RF tag, and the antenna a5 is an example of a fifth antenna.
 これにより、アタッチメント30に設けられたRFタグT3のタグ情報を、アンテナa5を介してより確実に取得することができる。 Thereby, the tag information of the RF tag T3 provided on the attachment 30 can be acquired more reliably via the antenna a5.
 また、アンテナa3は、RFタグT3に対して、RFタグT2に記憶されている情報を含む信号を送信する。 Further, the antenna a3 transmits a signal including the information stored in the RF tag T2 to the RF tag T3.
 これにより、RFタグT3にタグ情報を集約することができる。つまり、タグ情報の読み出しに要する手間を省くことができる。よって、作業性の低下を抑制することができる。 As a result, tag information can be aggregated in the RF tag T3. That is, it is possible to save the trouble required for reading the tag information. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability.
 また、フィーダ20は、長尺状であり、RFタグT2とRFタグT3とは、フィーダ20の長手方向において少なくとも一部が重ならないように配置されてもよい。 Further, the feeder 20 has a long shape, and the RF tag T2 and the RF tag T3 may be arranged so that at least a part thereof does not overlap in the longitudinal direction of the feeder 20.
 これにより、RFタグT2及びT3のそれぞれからタグ情報を読み出すことができる確実性が増す。 This increases the certainty that the tag information can be read from each of the RF tags T2 and T3.
 また、台車70は、RFタグT4が設けられたフィーダ、ケース又はテープフィーダが待機する待機エリアA21を有する。読取装置130は、RFタグT4に対して信号を送受信可能なアンテナa6を有する。 Further, the trolley 70 has a waiting area A21 in which a feeder, a case or a tape feeder provided with the RF tag T4 stands by. The reading device 130 has an antenna a6 capable of transmitting and receiving signals to and from the RF tag T4.
 なお、RFタグT4は、第4のRFタグの一例であり、アンテナa6は第6のアンテナの一例である。 The RF tag T4 is an example of a fourth RF tag, and the antenna a6 is an example of a sixth antenna.
 これにより、台車70の待機エリアA21に保管されている物体がある場合、当該物体に関するタグ情報(例えば、識別情報、残数情報など)を取得することができる。 As a result, if there is an object stored in the standby area A21 of the trolley 70, tag information (for example, identification information, remaining number information, etc.) related to the object can be acquired.
 (実施の形態の変形例1)
 次に、本変形例に係るケース210の構成について、図18及び図19を参照しながら説明する。図18は、本変形例に係るケース210の外観を示す図である。図19は、本変形例に係るケース210をフィーダ本体部240に取り付けた様子を模式的に示す図である。本変形例に係るケース210は、主に搬送部234を有する点において、実施の形態に係るケース10と相違する。以降において、本変形例に係るケース210について、実施の形態に係るケース10との相違点を中心に説明する。また、実施の形態に係るケース10と同一又は類似の構成については、実施の形態に係るケース10と同一の符号を付し、説明を省略又は簡略化する。
(Variation example 1 of the embodiment)
Next, the configuration of the case 210 according to this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing the appearance of the case 210 according to the present modification. FIG. 19 is a diagram schematically showing a state in which the case 210 according to this modification is attached to the feeder main body portion 240. The case 210 according to this modification is different from the case 10 according to the embodiment in that it mainly has a transport portion 234. Hereinafter, the case 210 according to the present modification will be described focusing on the differences from the case 10 according to the embodiment. Further, the same or similar configuration as the case 10 according to the embodiment is designated by the same reference numeral as the case 10 according to the embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.
 図18及び図19に示すように、ケース210は、実施の形態に係るケース10に加えて、搬送部234を有する。つまり、ケース210は、ケース本体部12と搬送部234とが一体的に形成されている。これは、搬送部234がケース210に収容される部品ごとに設けられることの一例である。 As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19, the case 210 has a transport unit 234 in addition to the case 10 according to the embodiment. That is, in the case 210, the case main body portion 12 and the transport portion 234 are integrally formed. This is an example in which the transport unit 234 is provided for each part housed in the case 210.
 搬送部234は、ケース本体部12から供給された部品を、実装ヘッド107により取り出される位置まで搬送する。本変形例では、搬送部234は、ケース本体部12から開口235aまで部品を搬送する。搬送部234は、振動発生部41が発生させる振動により部品を搬送する。搬送部234は、部品搬送部の一例である。なお、カバー235は、開口235aを覆い、実装が行われるまで閉状態である。 The transport unit 234 transports the parts supplied from the case main body 12 to the position where they are taken out by the mounting head 107. In this modification, the transport unit 234 transports the parts from the case main body portion 12 to the opening 235a. The transport unit 234 transports parts by the vibration generated by the vibration generation unit 41. The transport unit 234 is an example of a component transport unit. The cover 235 covers the opening 235a and is in a closed state until mounting is performed.
 ケース210は、ケース本体部12と搬送部234との境界にカバー11を有していてもよい。なお、図18では、カバー11の図示を省略している。なお、カバー11は設けられなくてもよい。 The case 210 may have a cover 11 at the boundary between the case main body portion 12 and the transport portion 234. In FIG. 18, the cover 11 is not shown. The cover 11 may not be provided.
 第2の凸部218は、ケース本体部12から搬送部234の下面にわたって設けられる長尺状の凸部である。例えば、ケース本体部12から搬送部234の下面にわたってケース210の長手方向に長い切り欠き部219が形成されることにより、第2の凸部218が形成される。 The second convex portion 218 is a long convex portion provided from the case main body portion 12 to the lower surface of the transport portion 234. For example, a second convex portion 218 is formed by forming a long notch 219 in the longitudinal direction of the case 210 from the case main body portion 12 to the lower surface of the transport portion 234.
 フィーダ本体部240は、ケース210が着脱可能に取り付けられる物体である。 The feeder main body 240 is an object to which the case 210 can be attached and detached.
 図19に示すように、フィーダ本体部240は、実施の形態に係るフィーダ本体部40に加えて、棒体246を有する。また、フィーダ本体部240は、駆動部45に代えて駆動部245を有する。 As shown in FIG. 19, the feeder main body 240 has a rod body 246 in addition to the feeder main body 40 according to the embodiment. Further, the feeder main body 240 has a drive unit 245 instead of the drive unit 45.
 駆動部245は、制御部51の制御により、カバー11の一端部を押圧するように設けられる棒体246をX軸方向に沿って移動させる。駆動部245は、ケース210がフィーダ本体部240に装着された状態で、棒体246をカバー11に物理的に作用させることで、カバー11を閉状態から開状態とする。駆動部245は、例えば、アクチュエータにより実現される。なお、棒体246は、ケース10の開口15に設けられるカバー11に作用する作用部の一例である。なお、駆動部245は、実施の形態に係る駆動部45の機能を有していてもよい。 The drive unit 245 moves the rod body 246 provided so as to press one end of the cover 11 along the X-axis direction under the control of the control unit 51. The drive unit 245 brings the cover 11 from the closed state to the open state by physically acting the rod body 246 on the cover 11 in a state where the case 210 is attached to the feeder main body unit 240. The drive unit 245 is realized by, for example, an actuator. The rod body 246 is an example of an acting portion that acts on the cover 11 provided in the opening 15 of the case 10. The drive unit 245 may have the function of the drive unit 45 according to the embodiment.
 このように、搬送部234が一体となったケース210を用いた場合においても、当該ケース210のカバー11の開閉における作業性の低下を抑制することができる。また、ケース210に搬送部234が一体となっているので、ケースとアタッチメントとを取り付ける工程を省略することができるので、作業性の低下をさらに抑制することができる。 As described above, even when the case 210 in which the transport unit 234 is integrated is used, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of workability in opening and closing the cover 11 of the case 210. Further, since the transport unit 234 is integrated with the case 210, the step of attaching the case and the attachment can be omitted, so that the deterioration of workability can be further suppressed.
 (実施の形態の変形例2)
 次に、本変形例に係るアタッチメント330の構成について、図20を参照しながら説明する。図20は、本変形例に係るケース10をアタッチメント330に取り付ける様子を模式的に示す図である。本変形例に係るアタッチメント330は、主にケース10がアタッチメント330に取り付けられることに連動して閉状態から開状態となるカバー333を有する点において、実施の形態に係るアタッチメント30と相違する。以降において、本変形例に係るアタッチメント330について、実施の形態に係るアタッチメント30との相違点を中心に説明する。また、実施の形態に係るアタッチメント30と同一又は類似の構成については、実施の形態に係るアタッチメント30と同一の符号を付し、説明を省略又は簡略化する。
(Modification 2 of the embodiment)
Next, the configuration of the attachment 330 according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing how the case 10 according to this modification is attached to the attachment 330. The attachment 330 according to the present modification is different from the attachment 30 according to the embodiment in that it mainly has a cover 333 that changes from the closed state to the open state in conjunction with the case 10 being attached to the attachment 330. Hereinafter, the attachment 330 according to the present modification will be described focusing on the differences from the attachment 30 according to the embodiment. Further, the same or similar configuration as the attachment 30 according to the embodiment is designated by the same reference numeral as the attachment 30 according to the embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.
 図20の(a)は、ケース10をアタッチメント330に取り付ける途中の状態を示す。図20の(a)に示すように、アタッチメント330は、開口32b(図20の(b)参照)に設けられ、X軸方向に移動することで開閉するカバー333を有する。カバー333は、ケース10から物理的に作用を受けることで、ケース10が延在する方向(X軸方向)に沿って移動する。カバー333は、被装着部332の内部に形成された傾斜面330aに対応した傾斜面333aを有する。傾斜面330a及び333aは、少なくとも一部が当接している。 FIG. 20A shows a state in which the case 10 is being attached to the attachment 330. As shown in FIG. 20 (a), the attachment 330 is provided in the opening 32b (see FIG. 20 (b)) and has a cover 333 that opens and closes by moving in the X-axis direction. The cover 333 moves along the direction in which the case 10 extends (X-axis direction) by being physically acted on by the case 10. The cover 333 has an inclined surface 333a corresponding to the inclined surface 330a formed inside the mounted portion 332. At least a part of the inclined surfaces 330a and 333a are in contact with each other.
 図20の(b)は、ケース10がアタッチメント330の取り付けられた状態を示す。図20の(b)に示すように、ケース10がX軸プラス側に移動することで、カバー333は、傾斜面330aの傾斜に沿って移動する。例えば、図20の(b)の例では、カバー333は、右上に移動する。そのため、カバー333の下方に、開口32bが現れる。ケース10からの部品は、当該開口32bを介してアタッチメント330の搬送部34に供給される。 FIG. 20B shows a state in which the case 10 is attached to the attachment 330. As shown in FIG. 20 (b), the cover 333 moves along the inclination of the inclined surface 330a by moving the case 10 to the plus side of the X-axis. For example, in the example of (b) of FIG. 20, the cover 333 moves to the upper right. Therefore, the opening 32b appears below the cover 333. The parts from the case 10 are supplied to the transport portion 34 of the attachment 330 through the opening 32b.
 このように、アタッチメント330は、バルク状態の部品を収容するケース10が着脱可能に取り付けられる被装着部332を備える。そして、ケース10は、被装着部332の開口32bに設けられるカバー333に作用する側面10a(作用部の一例)を有する。側面10aは、ケース10がアタッチメント330に取り付けられる動作に応じてカバー333に物理的に作用することで、カバー333を閉状態から開状態とする。例えば、ケース10がアタッチメント330に取り付けられる動作に連動して、カバー333が閉状態から開状態となる。なお、側面10aは、例えば、カバー11を含んで構成されてもよい。 As described above, the attachment 330 includes a mounted portion 332 to which the case 10 for accommodating the bulk parts is detachably attached. The case 10 has a side surface 10a (an example of the acting portion) that acts on the cover 333 provided in the opening 32b of the mounted portion 332. The side surface 10a physically acts on the cover 333 according to the operation of the case 10 being attached to the attachment 330, thereby changing the cover 333 from the closed state to the open state. For example, the cover 333 changes from the closed state to the open state in conjunction with the operation in which the case 10 is attached to the attachment 330. The side surface 10a may be configured to include, for example, the cover 11.
 また、ケース10がアタッチメント330から取り外されることで、カバー333が傾斜面333aに沿って左下に移動し、開口32bは自動で閉じられる。なお、アタッチメントのカバー333を下向きに付勢するバネがアタッチメントに設けられ、バネの付勢力によってカバー333が傾斜面333aに沿って移動してもよい。 Further, when the case 10 is removed from the attachment 330, the cover 333 moves to the lower left along the inclined surface 333a, and the opening 32b is automatically closed. A spring for urging the cover 333 of the attachment downward may be provided on the attachment, and the cover 333 may move along the inclined surface 333a by the urging force of the spring.
 これにより、カバー333を開閉するための操作を行うことなく、ケース10をアタッチメント330に取り付けるだけで、当該アタッチメント330のカバー333を閉状態から開状態とすることができるので、作業性の低下がさらに抑制される。 As a result, the cover 333 of the attachment 330 can be opened from the closed state by simply attaching the case 10 to the attachment 330 without performing an operation for opening and closing the cover 333, so that workability is reduced. It is further suppressed.
 なお、アタッチメント330には、部品が搬送される搬送部34と、ケース10との間に、中継室334が形成されていてもよい。中継室334は、ケース10の開口15から搬送部34に部品が供給される供給経路上に設けられる。センサ140は、例えば、中継室334にある部品を検出可能に設けられてもよい。 Note that the attachment 330 may have a relay chamber 334 formed between the transport unit 34 to which the parts are transported and the case 10. The relay chamber 334 is provided on a supply path in which parts are supplied from the opening 15 of the case 10 to the transport unit 34. The sensor 140 may be provided, for example, so as to be able to detect a component in the relay chamber 334.
 このようなアタッチメント330を有する実装システムにおいて、実施の形態の図13に示す動作を行う場合、中継室334に設けられるセンサ140の出力に基づいて、ケース10(第1の収容部の一例)の開口15に設けられるカバー11が開閉されてもよい(図13に示すステップS104及びS108に対応)。 In a mounting system having such an attachment 330, when the operation shown in FIG. 13 of the embodiment is performed, the case 10 (an example of the first accommodating portion) is based on the output of the sensor 140 provided in the relay chamber 334. The cover 11 provided in the opening 15 may be opened and closed (corresponding to steps S104 and S108 shown in FIG. 13).
 以上のように、本変形例に係る実装システム1のアタッチメント30は、部品が搬送される搬送部34と、ケース10との間に中継室334とを有する。本変形例に係る実装方法では、部品補給工程において、統合制御装置50は、中継室334における部品の残数を確認する。 As described above, the attachment 30 of the mounting system 1 according to this modification has a relay chamber 334 between the transport unit 34 to which the parts are transported and the case 10. In the mounting method according to this modification, the integrated control device 50 confirms the remaining number of parts in the relay chamber 334 in the parts supply step.
 なお、アタッチメント30は第2の収容部の一例であり、搬送部34は部品搬送部の一例であり、統合制御装置50は確認部の一例である。 The attachment 30 is an example of a second accommodating unit, the transport unit 34 is an example of a parts transport unit, and the integrated control device 50 is an example of a confirmation unit.
 これにより、搬送部34の上流側(ケース10側)にある中継室334の部品の残数又は部品の有無に応じて、ケース10を交換することが可能となる。例えば、ケース10内の部品が少ない又はゼロであるが、搬送部34により多くの部品が残っている状態で、ケース10を交換することができる。よって、搬送部34内の部品がなくなる前にケース10の交換を終えることの確実性が増す。 This makes it possible to replace the case 10 according to the remaining number of parts in the relay chamber 334 on the upstream side (case 10 side) of the transport unit 34 or the presence or absence of parts. For example, the case 10 can be replaced while the number of parts in the case 10 is small or zero, but more parts remain in the transport unit 34. Therefore, the certainty that the replacement of the case 10 is completed before the parts in the transport unit 34 are exhausted is increased.
 (実施の形態の変形例3)
 次に、本変形例に係るアタッチメント430の構成について、図21を参照しながら説明する。図21は、本変形例に係るアタッチメント430のカバー433の開閉を説明するための図である。図21は、変形例に係るケース10及びアタッチメント430をXZ平面で切断した模式部分断面図である。本変形例に係るアタッチメント430は、主にアタッチメント430のカバー433が、ケース10のカバー11が開閉することに連動して開閉するように構成されている点において、実施の形態に係るアタッチメント30と相違する。以降において、本変形例に係るアタッチメント430について、実施の形態に係るアタッチメント30との相違点を中心に説明する。また、実施の形態に係るアタッチメント30と同一又は類似の構成については、実施の形態に係るアタッチメント30と同一の符号を付し、説明を省略又は簡略化する。
(Variation example 3 of the embodiment)
Next, the configuration of the attachment 430 according to this modification will be described with reference to FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a diagram for explaining the opening and closing of the cover 433 of the attachment 430 according to the present modification. FIG. 21 is a schematic partial cross-sectional view of the case 10 and the attachment 430 according to the modified example cut in the XZ plane. The attachment 430 according to the present modification is the attachment 30 according to the embodiment in that the cover 433 of the attachment 430 is configured to open and close in conjunction with the opening and closing of the cover 11 of the case 10. It's different. Hereinafter, the attachment 430 according to the present modification will be described focusing on the differences from the attachment 30 according to the embodiment. Further, the same or similar configuration as the attachment 30 according to the embodiment is designated by the same reference numeral as the attachment 30 according to the embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted or simplified.
 図21の(a)は、ケース10がアタッチメント430に取り付けられ、かつ、照合作業が行われている状態であるとする。この状態では、棒体33が被装着部432内に収容されているので、カバー11は閉状態のままである。 In FIG. 21A, it is assumed that the case 10 is attached to the attachment 430 and the collation work is being performed. In this state, since the rod body 33 is housed in the mounted portion 432, the cover 11 remains in the closed state.
 カバー433は、開口433aを覆うように設けられる。本変形例では、カバー433は、弾性体434の付勢力によりカバー11と当接する。弾性体434は、例えば、コイルばねであるがこれに限定されない。カバー433の下面(Z軸マイナス側の面)の一部が開口433aを覆っている(搬送部34に対して露出している)。カバー433は、第2カバーの一例である。 The cover 433 is provided so as to cover the opening 433a. In this modification, the cover 433 comes into contact with the cover 11 due to the urging force of the elastic body 434. The elastic body 434 is, for example, a coil spring, but is not limited thereto. A part of the lower surface (the surface on the minus side of the Z axis) of the cover 433 covers the opening 433a (exposed to the transport portion 34). The cover 433 is an example of the second cover.
 図21の(b)は、照合が成功し、駆動部45により棒体33が押し出され、カバー11が棒体33により時計回りに回転した状態を示す。ここで、カバー11とカバー433とは当接しているので、カバー11が回転することにより、カバー433は弾性体434の付勢力に抗してX軸プラス側に移動する(スライドする)。これにより、カバー11が閉状態から開状態になることに連動して、カバー433も閉状態から開状態になる。 FIG. 21B shows a state in which the collation is successful, the rod body 33 is pushed out by the drive unit 45, and the cover 11 is rotated clockwise by the rod body 33. Here, since the cover 11 and the cover 433 are in contact with each other, the cover 11 moves (slides) to the X-axis plus side against the urging force of the elastic body 434 by the rotation of the cover 11. As a result, the cover 433 also changes from the closed state to the open state in conjunction with the change of the cover 11 from the closed state to the open state.
 弾性体434は、カバー11の回転によりカバー433が移動可能な程度のばね定数を有するとよい。また、開口433aにおける部品詰まりを抑制する観点から、カバー433が閉状態のときに搬送部34に露出している下面の部分のX軸方向の長さL以下でカバー433がカバー11によりX軸プラス側に移動可能するように構成されるとよい。 The elastic body 434 may have a spring constant such that the cover 433 can be moved by the rotation of the cover 11. Further, from the viewpoint of suppressing component clogging in the opening 433a, the cover 433 is X-axis by the cover 11 when the length L or less of the lower surface portion exposed to the transport portion 34 when the cover 433 is closed in the X-axis direction. It should be configured so that it can be moved to the plus side.
 また、カバー11を閉じる場合、駆動部45により棒体33が押し戻され、カバー11が反時計周りに回転する。ここで、カバー433は弾性体434の付勢力を受けてX軸マイナスが側に移動する(スライド)。これにより、カバー11が開状態から閉状態になることに連動して、カバー433も開状態から閉状態になる。部品混入を防止する観点から、カバー11は開状態から閉状態になるとともに、カバー433の側面に付着する部品を搬送部34へと落下させる構成となっている。 Further, when the cover 11 is closed, the rod body 33 is pushed back by the drive unit 45, and the cover 11 rotates counterclockwise. Here, the cover 433 receives the urging force of the elastic body 434 and the X-axis minus moves to the side (slide). As a result, the cover 433 also changes from the open state to the closed state in conjunction with the change of the cover 11 from the open state to the closed state. From the viewpoint of preventing the mixing of parts, the cover 11 is configured to be in the closed state from the open state and to drop the parts adhering to the side surface of the cover 433 to the transport portion 34.
 このように、本変形例に係るカバー433は、カバー11(作用部の一例)によりカバー11が閉開することに連動して閉開する。カバー433は、カバー11が物理的に作用することにより開閉するとも言える。 As described above, the cover 433 according to the present modification opens and closes in conjunction with the opening and closing of the cover 11 by the cover 11 (an example of the working portion). It can be said that the cover 433 opens and closes by the physical action of the cover 11.
 以上のように、本変形例に係るフィーダは、カバー433は、棒体33によりカバー11が閉開することに連動して閉開する。なお、カバー433は、第2カバーの一例であり、棒体33は作用部の一例であり、カバー11は第1カバーの一例である。 As described above, in the feeder according to this modification, the cover 433 closes and opens in conjunction with the opening and closing of the cover 11 by the rod body 33. The cover 433 is an example of the second cover, the rod 33 is an example of the working portion, and the cover 11 is an example of the first cover.
 これにより、ケース10及び被装着部432の双方にカバーがある場合、カバー433を開閉するための動作(又は制御)を行うことなく、カバー433の開閉を行うことができるので、作業性の低下をさらに抑制することができる。 As a result, when both the case 10 and the mounted portion 432 have a cover, the cover 433 can be opened and closed without performing an operation (or control) for opening and closing the cover 433, which reduces workability. Can be further suppressed.
 なお、上記では、作用部が被装着部432に設けられる例について説明したが、これに限定されず、作用部はケース10に設けられてもよい。ケース10に設けられる作用部は、被装着部432のカバー433に物理的に作用することで、カバー433を開ける。ケース10のカバー11は、カバー433と当接しており、カバー433が開くことに連動して開いてもよい。この場合、カバー11は、ケース10の内側に回転してもよい。また、カバー11は、カバー433が閉じることに連動して閉じてもよい。また、この場合、カバー433は第1カバーの一例であり、カバー11は第2カバーの一例となる。 Although the example in which the acting portion is provided on the mounted portion 432 has been described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and the acting portion may be provided on the case 10. The acting portion provided in the case 10 physically acts on the cover 433 of the mounted portion 432 to open the cover 433. The cover 11 of the case 10 is in contact with the cover 433 and may be opened in conjunction with the opening of the cover 433. In this case, the cover 11 may rotate inside the case 10. Further, the cover 11 may be closed in conjunction with the closing of the cover 433. Further, in this case, the cover 433 is an example of the first cover, and the cover 11 is an example of the second cover.
 (その他の実施の形態)
 以上、実施の形態及び各変形例(以降において、実施の形態等とも記載する)について説明したが、本開示は、このような実施の形態等に限定されるものではない。
(Other embodiments)
Although the embodiments and the modifications (hereinafter, also referred to as the embodiments) have been described above, the present disclosure is not limited to such embodiments.
 例えば、上記実施の形態等では、制御装置は、搬送ロボットを用いてケースの交換、並びに、供給ユニットの事前準備及び交換を行ったが、これに限定されない。制御装置は、提示装置を介して作業員にケースの交換、並びに、供給ユニットの事前準備及び交換を行うことを提示してもよい。提示装置は、例えば、液晶ディスプレイなどの表示装置であるが、出音装置などであってもよい。 For example, in the above-described embodiment or the like, the control device uses a transfer robot to replace the case, and prepares and replaces the supply unit in advance, but the present invention is not limited to this. The control device may offer the worker to replace the case, as well as prepare and replace the supply unit via the presentation device. The presenting device is, for example, a display device such as a liquid crystal display, but may be a sound output device or the like.
 また、上記実施の形態等における制御装置と、制御対象となる構成要素(例えば、駆動部、振動発生部、電源部、搬送ロボットなど)との通信は特に限定されず、有線通信により行われてもよいし、無線通信により行われてもよい。無線通信は、Wi-Fi(登録商標)、Bluetooth(登録商標)、ZigBee、光通信、又は特定小電力無線を用いて行われてもよい。 Further, the communication between the control device in the above embodiment and the like and the components to be controlled (for example, a drive unit, a vibration generating unit, a power supply unit, a transfer robot, etc.) is not particularly limited, and is performed by wired communication. It may be performed by wireless communication. Wireless communication may be performed using Wi-Fi®, Bluetooth®, ZigBee, optical communication, or specified low power radio.
 また、上記実施の形態等では、ケースとアタッチメントとの固定及びアタッチメントとフィーダ本体部との固定は、爪部と係合部とが係合することで行われる例について説明したが、それぞれの固定方法は、上記に限定されない。既知のいかなる固定方法が用いられてもよい。 Further, in the above-described embodiment and the like, an example in which the case and the attachment are fixed and the attachment and the feeder main body are fixed by engaging the claw portion and the engaging portion has been described. The method is not limited to the above. Any known fixing method may be used.
 また、上記実施の形態等では、フィーダ配置部の一例が台車である例について説明したが、これに限定されない。フィーダ配置部は、固定されている保持台(例えば、実装ラインに取り付けられている保持台)などであってもよい。つまり、フィーダ配置部は、移動可能なものに限定されない。 Further, in the above-described embodiment and the like, an example in which an example of the feeder arrangement portion is a trolley has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. The feeder arrangement portion may be a fixed holding base (for example, a holding base attached to a mounting line) or the like. That is, the feeder arrangement portion is not limited to the movable one.
 また、上記実施の形態等では、搬送部は、振動発生部の振動により部品を搬送する例について説明したが、部品の搬送方法はこれに限定されない。搬送部は、例えば、エアー供給、磁力、コンベア等により部品を搬送してもよい。 Further, in the above-described embodiment and the like, the transport unit has described an example of transporting parts by the vibration of the vibration generating portion, but the method of transporting the parts is not limited to this. The transport unit may transport parts by, for example, air supply, magnetic force, conveyor, or the like.
 また、上記実施の形態等における台車に設けられる読取装置は、複数のRFタグから送信されてきたタグ情報を同時に取得することができ、かつ、当該RFタグに書込むべき情報を複数のRFタグに同時に送信することができるリーダライタにより実現されてもよい。 Further, the reading device provided on the trolley in the above-described embodiment or the like can simultaneously acquire the tag information transmitted from the plurality of RF tags, and the information to be written in the RF tag can be written in the plurality of RF tags. It may be realized by a reader / writer that can transmit at the same time.
 また、上記実施の形態等では、作用部がケースの開口に設けられるカバーに作用することの一例として、作用部がカバーを押圧することを例示したが、作用することは押圧することに限定されない。作用することは、作用部とカバーとが係合した状態で作用部がカバーを引っ張る(図6の例ではX軸プラス方向に引っ張る)ことであってもよい。この場合、図6の例では、カバーは、回転軸Jを中心に時計回りに回転することで開口15が露出する。また、作用部がカバーに作用することは、作用部がカバーに間接的に作用することも含む。 Further, in the above-described embodiment and the like, as an example of the acting portion acting on the cover provided in the opening of the case, the acting portion presses the cover, but the acting portion is not limited to pressing. .. The action may be that the acting portion pulls the cover (pulling in the plus direction of the X-axis in the example of FIG. 6) in a state where the acting portion and the cover are engaged with each other. In this case, in the example of FIG. 6, the cover is rotated clockwise about the axis of rotation J to expose the opening 15. In addition, the action of the acting part on the cover also includes the indirect action of the acting part on the cover.
 また、本開示の全般的又は具体的な態様は、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム又はコンピュータ読み取り可能なCD-ROMなどの記録媒体で実現されてもよい。また、システム、装置、方法、集積回路、コンピュータプログラム及び記録媒体の任意な組み合わせで実現されてもよい。 Further, the general or specific aspects of the present disclosure may be realized by a recording medium such as a system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program, or a computer-readable CD-ROM. Further, it may be realized by any combination of a system, an apparatus, a method, an integrated circuit, a computer program and a recording medium.
 また、上記実施の形態等のフローチャートで説明された処理の順序は、一例である。複数の処理の順序は変更されてもよいし、複数の処理は並行して実行されてもよい。 Further, the order of processing described in the flowchart of the above embodiment is an example. The order of the plurality of processes may be changed, or the plurality of processes may be executed in parallel.
 また、ブロック図における機能ブロックの分割は一例であり、複数の機能ブロックを一つの機能ブロックとして実現したり、一つの機能ブロックを複数に分割したり、一部の機能を他の機能ブロックに移してもよい。また、類似する機能を有する複数の機能ブロックの機能を単一のハードウェア又はソフトウェアが並列又は時分割に処理してもよい。 In addition, the division of functional blocks in the block diagram is an example, and multiple functional blocks can be realized as one functional block, one functional block can be divided into multiple, and some functions can be transferred to other functional blocks. You may. Further, the functions of a plurality of functional blocks having similar functions may be processed by a single hardware or software in parallel or in a time division manner.
 また、上記実施の形態等において、各構成要素(例えば、制御部などの処理部)は、専用のハードウェアで構成されるか、各構成要素に適したソフトウェアプログラムを実行することによって実現されてもよい。各構成要素は、CPU(Central Processing Unit)又はプロセッサなどのプログラム実行部が、ハードディスク又は半導体メモリなどの記録媒体に記録されたソフトウェアプログラムを読み出して実行することによって実現されてもよい。また、例えば、各構成要素は、回路(または集積回路)でもよい。これらの回路は、全体として1つの回路を構成してもよいし、それぞれ別々の回路でもよい。また、これらの回路は、それぞれ、汎用的な回路でもよいし、専用の回路でもよい。 Further, in the above embodiment, each component (for example, a processing unit such as a control unit) is realized by being configured with dedicated hardware or by executing a software program suitable for each component. May be good. Each component may be realized by a program execution unit such as a CPU (Central Processing Unit) or a processor reading and executing a software program recorded on a recording medium such as a hard disk or a semiconductor memory. Further, for example, each component may be a circuit (or an integrated circuit). These circuits may form one circuit as a whole, or may be separate circuits from each other. Further, each of these circuits may be a general-purpose circuit or a dedicated circuit.
 その他、上記実施の形態等に対して当業者が思いつく各種変形を施して得られる形態、または、本開示の趣旨を逸脱しない範囲で各実施の形態における構成要素及び機能を任意に組み合わせることで実現される形態も本開示に含まれる。 In addition, it can be realized by subjecting various modifications to the above embodiments and the like that can be conceived by those skilled in the art, or by arbitrarily combining the components and functions of the respective embodiments without departing from the spirit of the present disclosure. The form to be used is also included in the present disclosure.
 本開示は、部品を基板に装着することによって実装基板を生産するためのシステム及び方法などに利用可能である。 This disclosure can be used for systems and methods for producing a mounting board by mounting a component on a board.
 1  実装システム
 10、210  ケース
 10a  側面
 11、17、32a、35、235、333、433  カバー
 11a  一端部
 12  ケース本体部
 12a  収容室
 12b、12b1、12b2、12b3、12b4、12b5  係止部
 12c  取付面
 13、36  係合部
 14  第1の凸部
 14a  位置決め部
 15、32b、35a、235a、433a  開口
 16、330a、333a  傾斜面
 17a  貫通孔
 18、218  第2の凸部
 19、219  切り欠き部
 20  フィーダ
 30、330、430  アタッチメント
 30a  第1部分
 30b  第2部分
 30c  第3部分
 32、332、432  被装着部
 33、246  棒体
 34、234  搬送部
 34a、39  ガイド部
 35b  当接部
 37、43  爪部
 38、44  凸部
 39a  支持部
 39b  溝部
 40、240  フィーダ本体部
 41  振動発生部
 45、245  駆動部
 50  統合制御装置
 50a  第1制御装置
 50b  第2制御装置
 51  制御部
 52  記憶部
 60  搬送ロボット
 61  ロボットアーム
 61a  篏合部
 62  走行部
 63  格納部
 63a  保持部
 70  台車
 71  保持部
 80  供給ユニット
 90  実装ライン
 100  部品実装装置
 101  基台
 102  基板搬送機構
 103  基板
 105  X軸移動テーブル
 106  Y軸移動テーブル
 107  実装ヘッド
 108  部品実装機構
 109  基板認識カメラ
 110  部品認識カメラ
 111  電源部
 120  ロール体ケース
 130  読取装置
 131  読取部
 132  切替部
 140  センサ
 141  部品検出部
 334  中継室
 434  弾性体
 A1  保管エリア
 A2  準備エリア
 A21  待機エリア
 A3  実装エリア
 a1、a2、a3、a4、a5、a6、a7  アンテナ
 C1、C2、C3、C4、C5  ケーブル
 J  回転軸
 L  長さ
 P  部品
 R  破線領域
 RW  リーダライタ
 T、T1、T2、T3、T4  RFタグ
 W  部品保管庫
 w1、w2  幅
1 Mounting system 10,210 Case 10a Sides 11, 17, 32a, 35, 235, 333, 433 Cover 11a One end 12 Case body 12a Storage chamber 12b, 12b1, 12b2, 12b3, 12b4, 12b5 Locking part 12c Mounting surface 13, 36 Engagement part 14 First convex part 14a Positioning part 15, 32b, 35a, 235a, 433a Opening 16, 330a, 333a Inclined surface 17a Through hole 18, 218 Second convex part 19, 219 Notch part 20 Feeder 30, 330, 430 Attachment 30a 1st part 30b 2nd part 30c 3rd part 32, 332, 432 Attached part 33, 246 Rod 34, 234 Transport part 34a, 39 Guide part 35b Contact part 37, 43 Claws Part 38, 44 Convex part 39a Support part 39b Groove part 40, 240 Feeder body part 41 Vibration generating part 45, 245 Drive part 50 Integrated control device 50a First control device 50b Second control device 51 Control part 52 Storage part 60 Transfer robot 61 Robot arm 61a Alignment part 62 Traveling part 63 Storage part 63a Holding part 70 Carriage 71 Holding part 80 Supply unit 90 Mounting line 100 Parts mounting device 101 Base 102 Board transfer mechanism 103 Board 105 X-axis moving table 106 Y-axis moving table 107 Mounting head 108 Parts mounting mechanism 109 Board recognition camera 110 Parts recognition camera 111 Power supply unit 120 Roll body case 130 Reading device 131 Reading unit 132 Switching unit 140 Sensor 141 Parts detection unit 334 Relay room 434 Elastic body A1 Storage area A2 Preparation area A21 Standby Area A3 Mounting area a1, a2, a3, a4, a5, a6, a7 Antenna C1, C2, C3, C4, C5 Cable J Rotation axis L Length P Parts R Broken line area RW Reader / writer T, T1, T2, T3, T4 RF tag W parts storage w1, w2 width

Claims (7)

  1.  バルク状態の部品を収容する第1の収容部が着脱可能であり、前記第1の収容部から供給された前記部品を収容する第2の収容部を有するフィーダと、前記フィーダにより供給される前記部品を保持して対象物に実装する部品実装部とを備える実装システムにおける実装方法であって、
     前記部品実装部により前記フィーダ内の前記部品を保持して前記対象物に実装する実装工程と、
     前記第2の収容部に前記部品が残っている状態で、前記第1の収容部を交換する部品補給工程とを含む、
     実装方法。
    A feeder having a first accommodating portion for accommodating parts in a bulk state and having a second accommodating portion for accommodating the parts supplied from the first accommodating portion, and the feeder supplied by the feeder. It is a mounting method in a mounting system including a component mounting unit that holds components and mounts them on an object.
    A mounting process in which the component in the feeder is held by the component mounting unit and mounted on the object.
    A component replenishment step of replacing the first accommodating portion with the parts remaining in the second accommodating portion is included.
    Implementation method.
  2.  前記部品補給工程は、前記実装工程において、前記対象物に対する前記部品の実装が時間的に連続して行われている間に実行される、
     請求項1に記載の実装方法。
    The component replenishment step is executed while the component is mounted on the object continuously in time in the mounting step.
    The mounting method according to claim 1.
  3.  前記部品補給工程では、前記部品の残数を確認する確認部の出力に基づいて、前記第1の収容部の開口に設けられる第1のカバーを開閉する、
     請求項1又は2に記載の実装方法。
    In the component replenishment step, the first cover provided in the opening of the first accommodating portion is opened and closed based on the output of the confirmation unit for confirming the remaining number of the components.
    The mounting method according to claim 1 or 2.
  4.  前記第2の収容部は、前記部品が搬送される部品搬送部と、前記第1の収容部との間に中継室とを有し、
     前記部品補給工程において、前記確認部は、前記中継室における前記部品の残数を確認する、
     請求項3に記載の実装方法。
    The second accommodating portion has a parts transporting portion on which the parts are transported and a relay chamber between the first accommodating portion.
    In the parts supply step, the confirmation unit confirms the remaining number of the parts in the relay chamber.
    The mounting method according to claim 3.
  5.  前記部品補給工程では、前記第1の収容部に収容される前記部品の種類に基づいて、前記第1のカバーが開閉される、
     請求項3又は4に記載の実装方法。
    In the component replenishment step, the first cover is opened and closed based on the type of the component accommodated in the first accommodating portion.
    The mounting method according to claim 3 or 4.
  6.  前記部品補給工程では、前記第1の収容部が前記フィーダの被装着部から取り外された状態の当該被装着部の開口が第2のカバーにより閉じられる、
     請求項1~5のいずれか1項に記載の実装方法。
    In the component replenishment step, the opening of the mounted portion in a state where the first accommodating portion is removed from the mounted portion of the feeder is closed by the second cover.
    The mounting method according to any one of claims 1 to 5.
  7.  バルク状態の部品を収容する第1の収容部が着脱可能であり、前記第1の収容部から供給された前記部品を収容する第2の収容部を有するフィーダと、
     前記フィーダにより供給される前記部品を保持して対象物に実装する部品実装部と、
     前記第2の収容部に前記部品が残っている状態で、前記第1の収容部を交換する制御を行う制御部とを備える、
     実装システム。
    A feeder having a detachable first accommodating portion for accommodating parts in a bulk state and having a second accommodating portion for accommodating the parts supplied from the first accommodating portion.
    A component mounting unit that holds the component supplied by the feeder and mounts it on the object.
    The second accommodating portion includes a control unit that controls replacement of the first accommodating portion while the parts remain in the second accommodating portion.
    Implementation system.
PCT/JP2021/025873 2020-08-31 2021-07-08 Mounting method, and mounting system WO2022044563A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2022545507A JPWO2022044563A1 (en) 2020-08-31 2021-07-08

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2020-145252 2020-08-31
JP2020145252 2020-08-31

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022044563A1 true WO2022044563A1 (en) 2022-03-03

Family

ID=80353169

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/025873 WO2022044563A1 (en) 2020-08-31 2021-07-08 Mounting method, and mounting system

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2022044563A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2022044563A1 (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023189623A1 (en) * 2022-03-30 2023-10-05 パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 Instruction system, instruction method, and program

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH08274496A (en) * 1995-03-30 1996-10-18 Tdk Corp Chip component supply device and chip component supply case
JPH08293697A (en) * 1995-04-21 1996-11-05 Sony Corp Bulk cassette
JPH10335888A (en) * 1997-06-04 1998-12-18 Juki Corp Method of preventing erroneous insertion of bulk cassette in bulk feeder
JPH1174693A (en) * 1997-08-27 1999-03-16 Tdk Corp Chip part supply system
JP2009295618A (en) * 2008-06-02 2009-12-17 Taiyo Yuden Co Ltd Part replenishment system for bulk feeder

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH08274496A (en) * 1995-03-30 1996-10-18 Tdk Corp Chip component supply device and chip component supply case
JPH08293697A (en) * 1995-04-21 1996-11-05 Sony Corp Bulk cassette
JPH10335888A (en) * 1997-06-04 1998-12-18 Juki Corp Method of preventing erroneous insertion of bulk cassette in bulk feeder
JPH1174693A (en) * 1997-08-27 1999-03-16 Tdk Corp Chip part supply system
JP2009295618A (en) * 2008-06-02 2009-12-17 Taiyo Yuden Co Ltd Part replenishment system for bulk feeder

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2023189623A1 (en) * 2022-03-30 2023-10-05 パナソニックIpマネジメント株式会社 Instruction system, instruction method, and program

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2022044563A1 (en) 2022-03-03

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN109156097B (en) Component mounting system
JP2022040553A (en) Feeder, storage body and mounting system
US10549432B2 (en) Component mounting apparatus
KR101074253B1 (en) Component Verification Method and Apparatus
JP2009105467A (en) Component collating method
JP6920599B2 (en) Component mounting system
JP6348687B2 (en) Nozzle container
EP3843517B1 (en) Moving work management device, moving work device, mounting system, and moving work management method
US11765876B2 (en) Exchange device
WO2022044563A1 (en) Mounting method, and mounting system
JP6676482B2 (en) Electronic component supply system
EP3806600A1 (en) Replacement system and replacement device
CN114072743A (en) Job management system
JP4045267B2 (en) Component number management method, component mounter and program
JP4291633B2 (en) Component supply tape connection member, connection member supply device, electronic circuit component supply system, electronic circuit component mounting system, component information providing method, and electronic circuit component supply method
JP2005101576A (en) Component collating method
EP2953439B1 (en) Electronic component mounting system and electronic component mounting method
WO2022044565A1 (en) Mounting system
EP3051935B1 (en) Component mounting apparatus
US20230035634A1 (en) System for preparing component feed unit
CN112772012B (en) Mounting substrate manufacturing system, component mounting system, and storage body transfer method
EP3843516B1 (en) Moving work management device, mounting system, and moving work management method
JP7270126B2 (en) Component mounting system and component mounting method
JP4317581B2 (en) Electronic circuit component mounting system
US20220219914A1 (en) Parts supply apparatus

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21860993

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2022545507

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase

Ref document number: 21860993

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1